2022 GRAND CHEROKEE WK
OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................8
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................................14
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................72
4STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................90
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................155
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................187
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................238
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................257
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................312
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ......................................................................................................318
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................322
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................9
ROLLOVER WARNING .............................................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 10
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 14
Key Fob .............................................................14
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 17
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 18
How To Use Remote Start................................19
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................20
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................20
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................20
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................21
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped........................................................21
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....21
To Arm The System .........................................21
To Disarm The System ....................................21
Rearming Of The System .................................22
Security System Manual Override...................22
Tamper Alert .....................................................22
DOORS.....................................................................22
Manual Door Locks ..........................................22
Power Door Locks ...........................................23
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry............23
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit......................25
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped .......................................................25
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors........................................................26
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................26
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped .......................................................26
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped .......................................................27
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped........................................................27
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ....28
Programming The Memory Feature ................28
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory .............................................................28
Memory Position Recall ...................................29
SEATS...................................................................... 29
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .......................................................29
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................31
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .......................................................32
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........................34
Head Restraints ...............................................34
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ....................... 37
Introducing Voice Recognition ........................37
Basic Voice Commands ...................................37
Get Started .......................................................37
Additional Information .....................................37
MIRRORS ............................................................... 38
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................38
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............................38
Outside Mirrors ................................................39
Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.........................................39
Power Mirrors ..................................................39
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped .......................................................40
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................40
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped .......................................................40
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
S
.................................................. 40
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.......................................................41
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............41
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code
Or Non-Rolling Code Device.............................41
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ..............................................................42
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ......................................42
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button ...............................................................43
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........43
Security .............................................................44
Troubleshooting Tips........................................44
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 44
Headlight Switch ..............................................44
Multifunction Lever .........................................45
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs).......................45
High/Low Beam Switch....................................46
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ..............46
Flash-To-Pass....................................................46
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped...............46
Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................46
Automatic Headlights With Wipers .................46
Headlight Delay ................................................47
Lights-On Reminder .........................................47
Fog Lights — If Equipped..................................47
Turn Signals......................................................47
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................48
Battery Saver....................................................48
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................48
Interior Courtesy Lights....................................48
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS...............49
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........................50
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............50
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..........................51
CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................51
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions...................................................51
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...........54
Climate Voice Commands................................54
Operating Tips .................................................55
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............56
Storage..............................................................56
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped ..................57
USB/AUX Control — If Equipped ......................57
Power Outlets ...................................................58
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................60
WINDOWS .............................................................. 61
Power Window Controls...................................61
Automatic Window Features ..........................61
Reset Auto-Up...................................................62
Window Lockout Switch...................................62
Wind Buffeting .................................................62
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 62
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ..................63
Pinch Protect Feature ......................................63
Sunshade Operation........................................63
Sunroof Maintenance ......................................63
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH
POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED........................... 64
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ..................64
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade ...65
Pinch Protect Feature ......................................65
Sunroof Maintenance ......................................65
HOOD....................................................................... 66
To Open The Hood............................................66
To Close The Hood ...........................................66
LIFTGATE................................................................. 66
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ..........................66
To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................67
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ..........................67
Cargo Area Features .......................................68
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............. 70
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE ................. 72
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................73
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 73
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls.............................................................74
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped ......................75
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ........75
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions (If Equipped) .......................................78
TRIP COMPUTER.................................................... 79
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 79
Red Warning Lights ..........................................79
Yellow Warning Lights ......................................82
Yellow Indicator Lights .....................................85
Green Indicator Lights......................................86
White Indicator Lights ......................................87
Blue Indicator Lights ........................................87
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....... 88
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ......................................88
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ............................................................ 89
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .........................................90
Automatic Transmission ..................................90
Normal Starting ................................................90
AutoPark ...........................................................91
Extended Park Starting....................................92
If Engine Fails To Start.....................................93
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...............................93
After Starting ....................................................93
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ...........93
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ..........94
PARKING BRAKE ...................................................94
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION................................95
Ignition Park Interlock......................................96
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .............................................................96
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode .............................96
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ...................97
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 101
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ..................... 101
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions —
If Equipped..................................................... 101
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions —
If Equipped..................................................... 101
Shift Positions ............................................... 102
Shifting Procedures....................................... 102
Quadra-Drive II System —
If Equipped .................................................... 103
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED ............................103
Description .................................................... 103
Air Suspension Modes.................................. 105
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 106
Operation....................................................... 106
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED .......................106
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection ...................... 106
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 107
POWER STEERING...............................................107
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............108
Autostop Mode .............................................. 108
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop......................................................... 108
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode.............................................................. 109
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 109
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 109
System Malfunction ...................................... 109
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................110
Cruise Control................................................ 110
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)...................... 112
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....................................120
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 121
ParkSense Display ........................................ 121
ParkSense Warning Display.......................... 124
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 124
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System ........................................................... 124
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 125
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 125
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................126
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System............................. 126
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation .................................... 127
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................130
LaneSense Operation ................................... 130
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 130
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 131
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 132
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............132
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...................................134
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ............ 134
VEHICLE LOADING ..............................................135
Certification Label ......................................... 135
TRAILER TOWING................................................ 136
Common Towing Definitions......................... 136
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 139
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)............... 140
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped..................................................... 141
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 141
Towing Requirements .................................. 142
Towing Tips ................................................... 145
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .................................... 146
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................... 146
Recreational Towing — Two Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 147
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel
Drive Models.................................................. 147
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/
Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 147
DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 150
On-Road Driving Tips..................................... 150
Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 150
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................155
CYBERSECURITY .................................................155
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................155
Customer Programmable Features ............. 156
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....................................174
Getting Started.............................................. 174
Video Screen ................................................. 175
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc...................................... 175
Play Video Games ......................................... 177
Important Notes For The Video Screen
System ........................................................... 178
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control.......... 178
Headphones Operation................................. 179
Controls.......................................................... 179
Replacing The Headphone Batteries........... 180
Accessibility — If Equipped ........................... 180
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty ........................................................ 180
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......183
Regulatory And Safety Information.............. 183
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ....................183
Off-Road Pages Status Bar........................... 184
Vehicle Dynamics.......................................... 184
Suspension.................................................... 185
Pitch & Roll .................................................... 185
Accessory Gauges......................................... 186
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped.......................... 186
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................187
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 187
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 188
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................195
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped..................................................... 195
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
With Mitigation .............................................. 199
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 201
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....................204
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........ 204
Important Safety Precautions....................... 204
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 205
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 213
Child Restraints ............................................. 221
SAFETY TIPS ........................................................234
Transporting Passengers.............................. 234
Transporting Pets ......................................... 234
Connected Vehicles....................................... 234
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 235
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 236
Exhaust Gas................................................... 237
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 237
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........................ 238
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..... 238
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ......................... 242
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 242
Jack Location................................................. 242
Spare Tire Stowage — If Equipped .............. 243
Jacking Instructions ..................................... 243
JUMP STARTING ................................................. 248
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 248
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 249
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .............................. 250
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................... 250
MANUAL PARK RELEASE................................... 251
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................. 253
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ......................... 253
Two-Wheel Drive Models .............................. 255
Four-Wheel Drive Models ............................. 255
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped .................................................... 256
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .................................................. 256
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........................ 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................257
Maintenance Plan......................................... 258
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................262
3.6L Engine ................................................... 262
Checking Oil Level......................................... 263
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 263
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 263
Pressure Washing ......................................... 264
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ....................................264
Engine Oil ...................................................... 264
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 265
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 265
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 266
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 268
Body Lubrication ........................................... 269
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 269
Exhaust System ............................................ 272
Cooling System.............................................. 273
Brake System ............................................... 275
Automatic Transmission ............................... 276
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................... 277
Transfer Case ............................................... 278
Fuses.............................................................. 278
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 286
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
TIRES .....................................................................291
Tire Safety Information ................................ 291
Tires — General Information ........................ 299
Tire Types....................................................... 302
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 303
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 305
Snow Traction Devices.................................. 306
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 307
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................308
Treadwear...................................................... 308
Traction Grades............................................. 308
Temperature Grades..................................... 308
STORING THE VEHICLE ......................................309
BODYWORK..........................................................309
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 309
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 309
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 309
INTERIORS ...........................................................310
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 310
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 311
Leather Surfaces........................................... 311
Glass Surfaces .............................................. 311
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........ 312
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................... 312
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. 312
Torque Specifications ................................... 312
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 313
3.6L Engine .................................................. 313
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 314
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 314
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................... 314
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles.......................................................... 314
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 315
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 315
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 315
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................. 316
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................. 317
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 317
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ............................................318
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 318
Prepare A List ................................................ 318
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 318
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .................................318
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 318
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 318
Mexico............................................................ 319
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 319
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 319
Service Contract ........................................... 319
WARRANTY INFORMATION
S
.........................320
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................320
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................320
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 320
In Canada ...................................................... 320
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................320
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................321
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle is designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before
you operate this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission,
and transfer case operation. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road,
or operating the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and
local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 150.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care
about your satisfaction.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles
can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions
that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of
severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use
of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
1
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 79.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 79
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 80
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 80
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 80
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 81
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 81
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 81
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 81
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 81
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 81
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 82
Red Warning Lights
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 82
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 82
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 82
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
Ú page 82
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 82
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 83
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 83
Red Warning Lights
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 83
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 83
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 83
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 83
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 83
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 84
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 84
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 84
Yellow Warning Lights
1
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 84
Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light
Ú page 85
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light
Ú page 85
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light
Ú page 85
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
Ú page 85
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
Ú page 85
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Yellow Warning Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 86
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
Ú page 86
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 86
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Yellow Indicator Lights
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 87
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
Ú page 87
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Green Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 87
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 87
White Indicator Lights
1
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote
Start (if equipped), and remote power liftgate
operation. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
the doors and liftgate from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands
are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
which will display directions to follow Ú page 321.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock
button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — PANIC Button
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and the security system will
arm (if equipped).
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
will stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through Uconnect
Settings Ú page 155.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Fob
Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the
instrument cluster display along with an interior
chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also
be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key
Left Vehicle feature will not activate until all of
the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the
key fob and pulling the emergency key out
with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace
the battery. When replacing the battery, match
the (+) sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the back
cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your
fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio-
ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key Ú page 321.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF,
ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power windows)
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake
pedal)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode by
pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
NOTE:
When opening the driver's door with the ignition
in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the
message will display “Ignition Or Accessory On”
in the cluster.
For more information on proper engine starting
procedures, see Ú page 90.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to
start the engine conveniently from
outside the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range Ú page 321.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing
the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
with a valid Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob in the
vehicle, press the brake pedal and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intru-
sion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the vehicle
security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the Remote Start button is pushed again, or if the
engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature
will turn on if selected in the comfort menu screen
within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 155. In warm
weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when Remote Start is activated,
if programmed in the comfort menu screen. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted
to the optimal temperature and mode settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position where the climate controls will
resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 51.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change if manually adjusted by the driver while the
vehicle is in Remote Start mode, and exit auto-
matic override. This includes the OFF button on the
climate controls, which will turn the system off.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume previous operation. If the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches
for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 23.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 23.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the
door key cylinder when the system is armed will
sound the alarm when the door is opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
when the power liftgate is opened using the
liftgate button on the key fob. If someone enters
the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door from the inside, the alarm will sound.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock
the liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is
disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will
remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock
on first press within Uconnect Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm,
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security
system in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three times
when you disarm the Vehicle Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To
lock each door, push the door lock knob on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock
knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
key fob is detected inside the vehicle when the
door lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even if
the key fob is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may
not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition
is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open,
the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door.
The door may be unlocked manually by raising the
lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 155.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp, posi-
tion lamps) for whichever time duration is set
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm the
Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all
doors and the liftgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Either the driver’s door only or all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle, depending on the selected setting
in the Uconnect system Ú page 155.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm
or armed status and the liftgate transitions from
opened to closed.
When the liftgate transitions from open to
closed and Remote Start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry
door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the
vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle
without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to
open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open
with the handle and no key fob is required.
The liftgate will either unlock along with the
vehicle doors, or it will need to be unlocked by
pushing the electronic liftgate release,
depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system Ú page 155.
The liftgate (and vehicle doors if unlocked) must
be locked using the lock button on the key fob,
the Passive Entry lock button, or the lock
buttons on the interior front door panels.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry
Location
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock
button located on the outside liftgate door handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate Ú page 321.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following sequence
of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 155.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature is
enabled/disabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 155.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the
system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if
the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the door
with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open a
door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is
impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to
check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping control is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control
To unlock the steering column, push the control
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
telescoping steering column control is located
below the multifunction lever on the steering
column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering
column.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, you can use your key fob or the memory
switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the
tilt/telescopic steering column to saved positions
Ú page 28.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the climate or controls screen of the
touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 20.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through a
memory switch. Each memory profile saves
desired position settings for the following features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory setting switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, and then push the desired
memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of
two saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system Ú page 155.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set”
(1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob within 10
seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before
another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual
front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by the
front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Adjustment Bar
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
WARNING!
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located
under the seat cushion and move the seat forward
or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release
the lever.
Recline Lever
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position,
lift the recline lever and push the seatback
forward. To return to the seating position, raise the
seatback and lock it into place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be properly adjusted, and you could
be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a seat
while the vehicle is parked.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release
the lever at the desired position. To return the
seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release
the lever.
Rear Seat Recline
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow
for extended cargo space and still maintain some
rear seating room.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear
seatback to fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release
the seat.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE:
Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the
left outboard or rear center seat belt
buckled.
Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the
right outboard seat belt buckled.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the seat belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision, you could slide under the
seat belt and be severely injured or killed. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are
left folded for an extended period of time. This is
normal and by simply unfolding the seats to the
open position, over time the seat cushion will
return to its normal shape.
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If
interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The power
seat switches are located on the outboard side of
the seat. There are two switches that control the
movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down
by using the power seat switch. The seat will move
in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with
the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded
down position) should not be used as a play
area by children when the vehicle is in motion.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the
proper restraint system.
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up
or down using the power seat switch. The front of
the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
return to its previously set position when you
place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or RUN
position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of
an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At
this position, there is no benefit to the driver by
moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
setting profile Ú page 28.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
through the programmable features in the
Uconnect system Ú page 155.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons
are located within the Uconnect system.
You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen and
the controls screen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
The indicator arrows in the touchscreen buttons
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
arrows will illuminate for HI, and one for LO.
Turning the heating elements off will return the
user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to
turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn
the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 20.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints —
Front Seats
Active Head Restraints (AHR) are passive,
deployable components, and vehicles with this
equipment cannot be readily identified by any
markings, only through visual inspection of the
head restraint. The AHRs will be split in two halves,
with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front
half of the head restraint extends forward to
reduce the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or
front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
For more information, see Ú page 204.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Adjustment Button
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be
tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head
restraint closer to the back of your head, pull
forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push
rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to
move the head restraint away from your head.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
In the event of deployment of an Active Head
Restraint, see Ú page 204.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a collision.
Do not place items over the top of the Active
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or
portable DVD players. These items may inter-
fere with the operation of the Active Head
Restraint in the event of a collision and could
result in serious injury or death.
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental
deployment of the Active Head Restraint
ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose
cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustment — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not
adjustable. They automatically fold forward when
the rear seat is folded to a load floor position, but
do not return to their normal position when the rear
seat is raised. After returning either seat to its
upright position, raise the head restraint until it
locks in place. The outboard head restraints are
not removable.
Returning Rear Head Restraint
The center head restraint has limited adjustment.
Lift upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push
downward on the head restraint to lower it.
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats
The center head restraint can be adjusted when
occupied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go by pulling upward. Then, push the release
button at the base of the post while pulling the
head restraint upward. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
Center Head Restraint Release Button
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see
Ú page 204.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying
a seat.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
outboard head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your VR
system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
GET STARTED
The Voice Recognition (VR) button is used to
activate/deactivate your Voice Recognition
system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you must
first push the Voice Recognition (VR) button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 321.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html
or call:
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit https://www.driveu-
connect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian
or call:
1-877-324-9091
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s rear view.
You can turn the Automatic Dimming Mirror
feature on or off by pushing the button at the base
of the mirror. A light in the button will illuminate to
indicate when the dimming feature is activated.
In the event that the mirror is not equipped with a
physical on/off button for auto dimming, there will
be a soft button in the radio to turn the Auto
Dimming Mirror feature on/off.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Button
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The outside driver’s side mirror, and passenger
mirror on some models, will automatically dim for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror.
The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight
glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's
side door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To
adjust a mirror, push the mirror select button for
the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror
control switch, push on any of the four arrows for
the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory Settings
Feature Ú page 28.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward
and unfolded into the normal driving position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and
R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, push the switch a second time and the
mirrors will return to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
cycle, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the normal driving position.
If the mirror does not fold automatically, check for
ice or dirt buildup at the pivot area, which can
cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power
folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
them by pushing the button (this may require
multiple attempts). This resets them to their
normal driving position.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 51.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE.
The outside mirrors will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with memory
settings, this feature will be linked to the
programmable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 155.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
the center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active Ú page 321.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make
sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to
activate the device you are trying to program your
HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow the
steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Follow the procedure on programming HomeLink®
to a garage door opener Ú page 42. Be sure to
determine if the device has a rolling code, or
non-rolling code before beginning the
programming process.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people or pets are in the path of the door or
gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
of transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the
button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some US gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until
HomeLink® has successfully accepted the
frequency signal. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step
2 and follow all remaining steps.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note
that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.
The headlight switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
cargo lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982.
Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features.
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Push Front Fog Light
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on,
the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the AUTO position to the first
detent to turn on parking lights and instrument
panel lights. Rotate the headlight switch to the
second detent to turn on headlights, parking lights,
and instrument panel lights.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter
and less susceptible to stone breakage than
glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as
glass and therefore different lens cleaning
procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) (low intensity)
come on whenever the engine is running, and the
transmission is not in the PARK position. The lights
will remain on until the ignition is placed in the OFF
or ACC position, or the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate or reduce intensity on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Push Front Fog Light
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials
to clean the lenses.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Where allowed by law, the DRLs function may be
disabled through the Uconnect system
Ú page 155.
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the
low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automatically controlling the high beams
through the use of a camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle
is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
“Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect
Settings Ú page 155, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head-
lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See
a local authorized dealer.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced
High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recom-
mended), toggle the high beam lever six full on/
off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON. The
system will return to the default setting upon
ignition off.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch to the A
(auto) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature
is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition
into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the
AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on
when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 155.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
If your vehicle is equipped with Rain Sensing
Wipers Ú page 50, and it is activated, the
headlights will automatically turn on after the
wipers complete five wipe cycles within
approximately one minute. They will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers
completely stop.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime,
the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
to the lower nighttime intensity.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to
90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
canceled by either turning the headlight switch on
then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON
position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 155.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
A (auto) position when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are
left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, the vehicle will chime when the driver’s
door is opened and a message will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking lights or headlights
position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control.
Fog Light Operation
Fog Light Operation (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on
low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog
lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the
switch is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is in the OFF
position and any door is left open or the dimmer
control is rotated all the way up to the dome light
on position, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
front doors are opened or when the dimmer control
is rotated to its upward most position. If your
vehicle is equipped with a key fob and the unlock
button is pushed, the courtesy and dome lights will
turn on. When a door is open and the interior lights
are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way
down, to the O (off) position, will cause all the
interior lights to go out. This allows the doors to
stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the
overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on
either side of the console. These buttons are
backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights off,
push the switch a second time. The lights will also
turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient
light feature. This light illuminates for improved
visibility of the floor and center console area.
Ambient Light
Dimmer Control
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can
be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up
(brighter) or down (dimmer). When the headlights
are on you can supplement the brightness of the
odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead
console by rotating the control to its upward most
position until you hear a click. This is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the windshield wiper/washer lever located on
the left side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
1 — Push End Of Lever And Hold For Front Washer
2 — Rotate Downward For Mist
3 — Rotate For Rear Wiper/Washer Operation
4 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four
detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth
detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent
for high wiper operation.
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings
when weather conditions permit. At driving speeds
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately
18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle
every one second (fourth detent). If the vehicle is
moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times
will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever
(toward the steering wheel) and hold. If the lever is
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers
will turn on and operate for several cycles after the
end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate for
several cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the washer will resume normal
operation.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST
position and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 269.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of
four detent positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay detent position
four is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed posi-
tion.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on
the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 155.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot
return to the “park” position, damage to the
wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission
is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the third detent to activate the
washer. The washer will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held.
Rotate the center portion downward from the
OFF position to activate the rear washer. The
washer will continue to operate as long as the
switch is held.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “park” position.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen and on the instrument
panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when
MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to exit. Pressing other
settings will cause the MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when
A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press
and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the current setting.
The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on.
Auto will achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by adjusting distribution and blower
speed. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active during
AUTO operation to improve performance. Toggling
this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes
Ú page 54. Auto mode is highly recommended for
efficiency.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen
button, or push and release the button
on the faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is
on. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Up And Down
Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the Up button on the faceplate or
press and slide the temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the Down button on the faceplate or
press and slide the temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
synchronize the passenger temperature setting
with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
will cause automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected using either
the blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change
the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen or push the OFF button on
the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 155.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead.
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 309.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
comfort. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for a
minute to flush out the
hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and
turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels
for easy access.
Console Features
The center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
Storage Compartment
Storage Compartment Latches
To open the upper storage compartment, pull
upward on the small latch located on the lid.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in injury
in a collision.
1 — Upper Storage Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Storage Compartment Latch
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access
the lower storage compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment
Overhead Sunglasses Storage
At the front of the console, a compartment is
provided for storing a pair of sunglasses. The
storage compartment access is a “push/push”
design. Push the pad on the door to open. Push the
chrome pad on the door to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are
equipped with a light ring that illuminates the
cupholders for the front passengers.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
USB/AUX CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Connecting The External USB/AUX Device
Use the connection cable to connect an external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector
port which is located in the center console.
The USB ports on the media hub are equipped with
a Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator (Smart
Charge) feature. This feature allows a device to
charge for up to one hour after the vehicle is
powered off.
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
1 — USB Port One
2 — AUX Port
3 — USB Port Two
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Once the audio device is connected and
synchronized to the vehicle’s USB control system
(an external USB device may take a few minutes to
connect), the audio device starts charging and is
ready for use.
NOTE:
If the audio device battery is completely
discharged, it may not communicate with the USB
control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the USB
control system can charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to the
USB port:
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s
sound system, providing metadata (artist, track
title, album, etc.) information on the radio
display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track infor-
mation may not be present on the radio display.
The audio device can be controlled using the
radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the
contents.
The audio device battery charges when plugged
into the USB connector (if supported by the
specific audio device).
NOTE:
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Second Row USB Charging Port
Second row USB connector ports can be used for
charging purposes only. Use the connection cable
to connect an external USB device to the charging
ports which are located on the rear of the center
console.
Rear Center Console USB Ports
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low powered
electrical accessories. The power outlets are
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
labeled with a key symbol are powered when the
ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a battery symbol are
connected directly to the battery and powered at
all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
The front power outlet is located inside the storage
area on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Push inward on the storage lid to open the
compartment and gain access to this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a
power outlet located in the storage area of the
center console.
Center Console Outlet
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear power outlet can be switched from
ignition only to battery powered all the time. See
your local authorized dealer for details.
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
NOTE:
Certain video game consoles, new computers and
power tools will exceed this power limit.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of 150
Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
Instrument Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated
by using the single window controls on the
passenger door trim panel. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch down briefly and release.
If equipped, the key fob may also be used to raise
or lower vehicle windows while the ignition is in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time is programmable within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 155.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down for a short period of time,
then release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
and release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button. To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again.
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in
the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped)
in certain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof
open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the
sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one-half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called Express Vent and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
Mode.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually. However,
the sunshade will open automatically as the
sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING!
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops
for the sunroof open position: a comfort stop
position and a full open position. The comfort stop
position has been optimized to minimize wind
buffeting.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the
sunshade will automatically open to the half open
position prior to the sunroof opening.
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one-half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called Express Vent, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automati-
cally cycle to the halfway open position prior to the
sunroof opening to the Vent position.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
UNSHADE
The sunshade has two programmed positions: half
open and full open positions. When operating the
sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade
will always stop at the half open position
regardless of express or manual open operation.
The switch must be actuated again to continue on
to full open position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half
open position will first automatically close the
sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second, the sunshade will open to
the half open position and stop automatically.
Push and release the switch again from the half
open position and the sunshade will open to the
full open position and stop automatically.
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it
within one-half second and the sunshade will close
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the
sunshade will open to the half open position and
stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade
switch again and the sunshade will open to the full
open position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunshade will close and stop at full closed position.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in
motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open
position.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
Mode.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located at the bottom of
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to
the left and lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front
edge ofthe hood with moderate force until the
angle is below the pointwhere the gas props are no
longer resisting. Then let the hood continue tofall
into the closed position on its own.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Key fob
Outside handle
Button on overhead console
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release handle. With a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release handle
to open. Push the button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to release the liftgate.
NOTE:
When you push the button on the liftgate, either
only the liftgate will unlock or all doors and the
liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected
setting in the Uconnect system Ú page 155.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either front door
trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the
liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and
the driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and
unlock the liftgate.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate
closing handle and pull in a downward motion to
close the liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button, located next to the electronic release
handle, will lock the vehicle.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the
button, located in the upper left trim in the liftgate
opening. This button cannot be used to open the
liftgate.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec-
tronic liftgate release handle.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by
pushing the electronic liftgate release
handle Ú page 23, or by pushing the
liftgate button on the key fob. Push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the power liftgate.
NOTE:
When using the liftgate button on the key fob to
open the liftgate while the vehicle is locked, only
the liftgate will unlock leaving the other doors to
remain locked. Closing the liftgate will not relock
the liftgate. The lock button on the key fob, or
the Passive Entry lock button must be pushed to
relock.
If the electronic release handle is used to unlock
and open the liftgate and all the doors unlock,
the liftgate and vehicle doors must be locked
again. Use the key fob, Passive Entry lock
button, or the power door lock switches on the
front door panels.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front
overhead console. If the liftgate is fully open, the
liftgate can be closed by pushing the liftgate button
located on the left rear trim panel. If the liftgate is
in motion, pushing the button again will reverse the
liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed
two times, the turn signals will flash to signal that
the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps
with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect Settings), and
the liftgate chime will be audible. The chime can be
turned on or off through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 155.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Passive Entry Lock Button Location
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by these
fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are
operating the vehicle.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
In the event of a power malfunction to the lift-
gate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be
used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate
latch release can be accessed through a snap-in
cover located on the liftgate trim panel.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
NOTE:
The power liftgate will not operate in tempera-
tures below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures
above 150°F (65°C). Be sure to remove any
buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before
pushing any of the power liftgate switches.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position. After
multiple obstructions in the same cycle, the lift-
gate will automatically stop and must be opened
or closed manually.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of
the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to
the open position.
If the liftgate is only partially open, push the lift-
gate button on the key fob twice to operate the
liftgate.
If the electronic liftgate release handle is
pushed while the power liftgate is opening, the
liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual
operation.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage Bins — If Equipped
There are up to four removable storage bins
located in the rear cargo area. There are two
storage bins located on either side of the cargo
area.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer,
the storage bin on that side will not be available.
Rear Storage Bin
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel
path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed
and latched before driving away.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set at
high speed. Do not use the recirculation
mode.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Two additional storage bins may be located under
the load floor. To access the lower storage bins,
raise the load floor and if equipped, attach the
tether strap (attached to the bottom of the load
floor) to the liftgate opening.
Tether Strap
Rear Lower Storage Bins (If Equipped)
Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting
or protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grab the cover at the center handle and pull
over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo
cover in place.
Rear Cargo Cover
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a
sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle.
Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor
or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its
mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
(Continued)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo
area floor, should be used to safely secure loads
when the vehicle is moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry
loads on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
should be uniformly distributed over the luggage
rack crossbars.
NOTE:
If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar® crossbars
built specifically for this roof rack system.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the rear
cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended
for load carrying purposes only, not for
passengers, who should sit in seats and use
seat belts.
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for
a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the
child seat to come loose. A child could be
badly injured. Use only the anchors provided
for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow these
guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads which exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to the
left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor.
Put heavier objects as low and as far forward
as possible.
WARNING!
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
stop or accident.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
(Continued)
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure
the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that
on the external rack does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments,
located at the upper edge of each crossbar,
approximately eight turns using the anti-theft
wrench provided with the Mopar® crossbars.
Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame.
Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
retighten with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
position.
NOTE:
To help control wind noise when the crossbars
are not in use, place the front and rear cross-
bars approximately 24 inches (61 cm) apart.
Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved
by adjusting the front crossbar forward or rear-
ward using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm).
If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped),
you may experience interruption of satellite
radio reception. For improved satellite radio
reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over
the satellite radio antenna.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
in personal injury or property damage. Follow
the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle,
do not carry any loads on the roof rack without
the crossbars installed. The load should be
secured and placed on top of the crossbars,
not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to
place the load on the roof, place a blanket or
some other protection between the load and
the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute
heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
the load appropriately.
Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
with large frontal area should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between
the surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
upward lift to a load. This is especially true on
large flat loads and may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
The use of Sport Mode is not recommended
when using the Roof Luggage Rack to carry a
load.
CAUTION!
2
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather or
up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
4. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display Ú page 74.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located Ú page 134.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers in
the odometer. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections and
adjustments
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 273.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The interactive display area to the left side of
the screen depicts which menus are being
accessed in the main display area.
The top line where reconfigurable telltales,
compass direction, outside temperature, Time,
Range MPG or Trip menu items are displayed.
This also displays the speedometer when other
menu pages are displayed.
The main display area where the menus and
pop-up messages are displayed.
The lower line where reconfigurable telltales,
menu name and menu page are displayed.
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up or down arrow button allows you
to cycle through the main menu Items and changes
the main Screen area and menu title area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the
left or right arrow button allows you
to cycle through the submenu items of the main
menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the up / down or left / right
arrow button will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options presented
on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main menu
will be displayed.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item. To reset displayed/selected
features push and hold the OK button for two
seconds.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
OIL CHANGE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instrument
cluster display for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change
indicator system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the
engine).
2. Navigate to “Oil Life” submenu in “Vehicle
Info” in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the
OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view
the main menu items for several features. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll through
the driver interactive display menu options until
the desired menu is reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
Main Gauge
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Main Gauge menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the
left or right arrow button to
select the analog or digital type speedometer
display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle
units (mph or km/h) of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the
left or right arrow button to scroll through
the information submenus and push and release
the
OK button to select or reset the submenus.
Tire Pressure Oil Pressure
Transmission
Temperature
Oil Life
Oil Temperature Battery Voltage
3
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Terrain — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the
right or left arrow button to display the
Selec-Terrain, Air Suspension, Drivetrain, and
Wheel Articulation.
Selec-Terrain: Displays messages concerning
Selec-Terrain status.
Air Suspension — If Equipped: Displays
messages concerning Air Suspension status.
Drivetrain: Displays information on drivetrain
status of Front Wheel Angle, T-Case, and Axle
Lock.
Wheel Articulation: Displays current wheel artic-
ulation.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
ACC and LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on the status of
ACC and LaneSense.
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following displays
in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button
(located on the steering wheel) and the following
will display in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity Ú page 112.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings. The information
displayed depends on LaneSense system status
and the conditions that need to be met
Ú page 130.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset average fuel economy feature.
Toggle
left or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range
value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated
driving distance, the Range display will change
to a “RANGE LOW” message. Adding a signifi-
cant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the “RANGE LOW” message and a new Range
value will display. Range cannot be reset
through the
OK button.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the
last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Toggle the
left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start — If Equipped
Press and release the
up or down
arrow button on the steering wheel to
scroll to the Stop/Start menu in the driver
interactive display. This menu will give
access to Stop/Start settings using the
left and
right arrow buttons on the steering wheel
Ú page 108.
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Audio menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu icon is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the
left or right arrow button will
allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the
OK button to enter the submenus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None Compass Outside Temp
Time Range
Fuel Economy
Average
Fuel Economy
Current
Trip A Trip B
Upper Right
None Compass Outside Temp
Time Range
Fuel Economy
Average
Fuel Economy
Current
Trip A Trip B
3
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Gear Display
Full
Single
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Cancel
Restore
Current Gear
On
Off
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press
OK button to choose show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
Ú page 80.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
150W, USB ports) during certain driving condi-
tions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Vehicle Info
Terrain
(show/hide)
Driver Assist
(show/hide)
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Trip Info
(show/hide)
Stop/Start
Audio
(show/hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Trip icon shows in the instrument
cluster display (Toggle
left or right to select
Trip A or Trip B).
Trip A/Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A/
Trip B since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A/
Trip B since the last reset.
Shows average fuel consumption for Trip A/
Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition
switch is in the ON or START position.
To Reset Trip A/B Function
Reset will only occur while a function is selected.
Push and hold the
OK button to reset/clear the
function being displayed.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales
will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
3
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 107.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool;
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 250.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
3
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound Ú page 204.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light
This light will turn on when the ACC
system is not operating and needs
service Ú page 112.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running.
If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system
will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning
light will flash when the vehicle is
crossing the lane marker Ú page 130.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will
turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate and a
single chime will sound when the
windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 263.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
3
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service Ú page 199.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is actively adjusting
the ride height Ú page 103.
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light—
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle
is automatically lowered from ride height
position downward for easy entry and exit
of the vehicle.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Aerodynamic setting Ú page 103.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Off-Road
1 setting Ú page 103.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Off-Road
2 setting Ú page 103.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that FCW is off Ú page 199.
4WD Low Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
increased torque at the wheels Ú page 101.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
mode and the front and rear driveshafts
are disengaged from the powertrain.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and there is no
vehicle in front detected Ú page 112.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
a vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 112.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed Ú page 110.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 44.
LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings
have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs Ú page 130.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 44.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active Ú page 101.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode Ú page 108.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on,
but not set Ú page 112.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise
control has been turned on, but not set
Ú page 110.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the
4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has
been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line Ú page 130.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec-Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”,
assure the vehicle is Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Low
and push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
3
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 155.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
The OBD ll may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery
or a battery replacement. If the OBD ll system
should be determined not ready for the I/M test,
your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Switch the ignition to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is
now ready.
3
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your
seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or
PARK (P) position before you can start the engine.
Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving
gear.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button again.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the OFF position, key fob is removed from
the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
WARNING!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop and
the engine is at idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
The ignition will return to the OFF position.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle
stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button
is pushed once, the transmission will automat-
ically select PARK and the engine will turn off,
however the ignition will remain in the ACC
position (NOT the OFF position). Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
3. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once
will turn the engine off. The ignition will remain
in the ACC position.
4. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds (or three short pushes in a
row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC position (NOT the OFF
position) if the engine is turned off when the
transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the
ignition will cycle to the OFF position after
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in the
ACC or ON/RUN (engine not running) position and
the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions
without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC position
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”)
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (instrument cluster will display
“ON/RUN”)
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”)
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could
be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same
time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simul-
taneously, a warning message will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 74.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK if the below occur. It is
a back-up system and should not be relied upon as
the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and on the gear
selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your
vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmis-
sion
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC position.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmis-
sion
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases,
the shifter must be returned to “P” to select
desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “
AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when
both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “
AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and on the shifter. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
the battery to ensure a full battery charge
during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool,
then repeat the “Extended Park Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle
has not experienced an extended park condition
as previously defined, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold
it there while the engine is cranking. This should
clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and brake pedal,
wait 10 to 15 second, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(BELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
3.6L Engine — Bundled and strapped behind the
engine air cleaner assembly.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 248.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and rear
axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration
in low gear can be detrimental and should be
avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality and
energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate and
conditions under which vehicle operations will
occur Ú page 317.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break-in period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK (P) position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below
the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To
apply the parking brake, firmly push the parking
brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake,
press the parking brake pedal a second time and
let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
WARNING!
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
position. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is
OFF (not in ACC
position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The
brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) MODE
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the
vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal
driving conditions. Push the “ECO” switch in the
center stack of the instrument panel to activate or
disable ECO mode. A light on the switch indicates
when ECO mode is disabled.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged,
the vehicle control systems will change the
following:
The transmission will upshift sooner and down-
shift later.
The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
WARNING!
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension will
operate in "Aero" mode over a broader speed
range Ú page 103.
Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other
factors.
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) —
If Equipped
The ANC system uses four microphones embedded
in the headliner to detect undesirable exhaust
noise, which sometimes occurs when operating in
specific driving conditions such as ECO and Tow
mode. An on-board frequency generator creates
counteracting sound waves through the audio
system to help keep the vehicle quiet.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster. To select a gear range, push the lock
button on the gear selector and move the selector
rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out
of PARK (P), the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into
DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE
range for normal driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-cali-
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
ters).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and MANUAL (M) or SPORT
(S) (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the MANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position), or tapping the paddle
shifters(+/-), (if equipped) will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear
in the instrument cluster Ú page 99.
Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake
Shift the transmission into PARK
Turn the ignition OFF
Remove the key fob from the vehicle
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button
on the gear selector and firmly move the
selector all the way forward until it stops and is
fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 146.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 253.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 99. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M) OR SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED
The MANUAL (M, +/-) or SPORT (S, +/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual
control of transmission shifting (also known as
AutoStick mode Ú page 99). Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
MANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) position will
manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer):
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance. This feature can also provide
you with more control during passing, city driving,
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
Paddle Shifters
Operation
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector
(in the MANUAL or SPORT position), or the paddle
shifters (if equipped), to manually shift the
transmission. To activate AutoStick mode, move
the gear selector into the MANUAL (M) or SPORT
(S) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tap one
of the paddle shifters on the steering wheel (if
equipped). Tapping the (-) shift paddle (if
equipped) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift
the transmission to the next lower gear, while
tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the
current gear. The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
AutoStick mode has the following operational
benefits:
The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the trans-
mission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range,
SNOW mode, or SAND mode). Tapping (+)
(at a stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear.
Starting out in SECOND or THIRD gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle pressed (if equipped), or
holding the gear selector in the (-) position, will
downshift the transmission to the lowest gear
possible at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift
paddle (if equipped, and the gear selector is
already in DRIVE) until "D" is once again indicated
in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of
AutoStick at any time without taking your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode Button
Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode
feature. The engine, transmission, and steering
systems are all set to their SPORT settings. SPORT
Mode will provide improved throttle response and
modified transmission shift points for an enhanced
driving experience, as well as a greater amount of
steering feel. This mode may be activated and
deactivated by pushing the SPORT button on the
instrument panel switch bank.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
QUADRA-TRAC I OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time
four-wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The
Brake Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines
standard ABS and Traction Control, provides
resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow
additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
conditions where 4WD LOW range is recom-
mended Ú page 150.
QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic
in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The
Quadra-Trac II transfer case provides three
positions:
4WD AUTO
N (NEUTRAL)
4WD LOW
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4WD LOW
position is intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOW position on
dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire
wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 4WD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each 4WD system mode position, see the
information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is the default operating mode for daily
use.
N (NEUTRAL)
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is used for towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle Ú page 146.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which allows
for increased torque to be delivered to both the
front and rear wheels while providing maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position or the engine running, shift the
transmission into “N”, and push the 4WD LOW
button once on the transfer case switch.
The 4WD LOW indicator light in the instrument
cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when
the shift is complete.
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection
condition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph
(5 km/h) Put Trans in “N” Press 4 Low” message
will flash from the instrument cluster display
Ú page 74.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), and push the 4WD LOW button once
on the transfer case switch. The 4WD LOW
indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
and go out when the shift is complete.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection
condition exists, a “For 4x4 High Slow Below
3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in NEUTRAL push
4 Low” message will flash from the instrument
cluster display Ú page 74.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with
the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
culty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth
not being properly aligned. Several attempts may
be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred method is
with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h).
If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
QUADRA-DRIVE II SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Drive II System features two torque
transfer couplings. The couplings include an
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle
and the Quadra-Trac II transfer case. The ELSD
axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input
to operate. Under normal driving conditions, the
unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque
evenly between left and right wheels. With a
traction difference between left and right wheels,
the coupling will sense a speed difference.
As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other,
torque will automatically transfer from the wheel
that has less traction, to the wheel that has
traction. While the transfer case and axle coupling
differ in design, their operation is similar.
Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case shifting
information, preceding this section, for shifting
this system.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides
full time load leveling capability along with the
benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the push of
a button. The vehicle will automatically raise and
lower the ride height to adapt to the appropriate
driving conditions. At higher speeds, the vehicle
will lower to an aerodynamic ride height and when
operating in off-road modes, the vehicle will raise
the ride height accordingly. The buttons near the
terrain switch in the center console area can be
used to set preferred ride height to match the
appropriate conditions.
Selec-Terrain Switch
1 — UP Button
2 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
3 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
6 — DOWN Button
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for
normal driving.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 1.1 inches [28 mm]) – This is the
primary position for all off-road driving until OR2
is needed. A smoother and more comfortable
ride will result. Push the UP button once from
the NRH position while the vehicle speed is
below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1
position, if the vehicle speed remains between
40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed
exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be
automatically lowered to NRH Ú page 150.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 2.2 inches [55 mm]) – This position is
intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, push the UP button twice from the
NRH position or once from the OR1 position
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be
automatically lowered to OR1 Ú page 150.
Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inches [15 mm]) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle.
The vehicle will automatically enter Aero when
the vehicle speed remains between 52 mph
(83 km/h) and 56 mph (90 km/h) for greater
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
56 mph (90 km/h). The vehicle will return to
NRH from Aero Height if the vehicle speed
remains between 20 mph (32 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds
or if the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(32 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero Height,
regardless of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in
SPORT mode.
Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 1.6 inches [40 mm]) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit, push the DOWN
button once from (NRH) while the vehicle speed
is below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the vehicle
speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the
vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle
speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds,
or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the Entry/Exit change will be canceled. To exit
Entry/Exit, press the Up button once while in
Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph
(24 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit
can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch-
screen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle
will only lower if the gear selector is in PARK, the
terrain switch is in AUTO, the transfer case is in
AUTO and the vehicle level is either in Normal or
Aero. The vehicle will not automatically lower if the
air suspension level is in OR2 or OR1. If the vehicle
is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the
lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is
switched OFF to prevent setting the alarm off.
The Selec-Terrain system will automatically change
the vehicle to the proper height based on the
position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The height can
be changed from the default Selec-Terrain setting
by normal use of the air suspension buttons
Ú page 106.
The system requires that the engine be running for
all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the
doors, including the liftgate, must be closed. If a
door is opened at any time while the vehicle is
lowering the change will not be completed until the
open door(s) is/are closed.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a
lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming
traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the
vehicle will move up first and then the front. When
lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first
and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that
the air suspension system operates briefly; this is
normal. The system is correcting the position of the
vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the
Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a feature
which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 155.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done
through the radio Ú page 155.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to
protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire or setting up
trailer weight distribution bars, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled Ú page 155.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the air
suspension system has a feature which
automatically lowers the vehicle to Entry/Exit ride
height Ú page 155.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle into
Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load
leveling system Ú page 155.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The Suspension Display Messages setting allows
you to only display suspension warnings
Ú page 155.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
must be enabled Ú page 155.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
If equipped with a touchscreen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done
through the radio Ú page 155.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
personal injury or damage to the system, see an
authorized dealer for service.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
will appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 74.
OPERATION
The indicator lamps 2 through 5 will illuminate to
show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing
indicator lamps will show a position which the
system is working to achieve. When raising, if
multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the UP
button, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the
position the system is working to achieve. When
lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the
DOWN button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the
position the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the UP button once will move the
suspension one position higher from the current
position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e.
engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The
UP button can be pushed multiple times. Each
push will raise the requested level by one position
up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest
position allowed based on current conditions
(i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the DOWN button once will move the
suspension one position lower from the current
level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine
running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc).
The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times.
Each push will lower the requested level by one
position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit Height or
the lowest position allowed based on current
conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The
indicator lamps and instrument cluster display
messages will operate the same for automatic
changes and user requested changes.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 2, 3, and 4
will be illuminated.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will
be illuminated.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4
will be illuminated.
Entry/Exit Height – Indicator lamp 5 will be illu-
minated.
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
minated. Driving will disable Transport Mode.
Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 2 and 5 will
be illuminated. Driving will disable Tire/Jack
Mode.
Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and
5 will be illuminated. Driving will disable Wheel
Alignment Mode.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to
provide the best performance for all terrains.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off-road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. When in
SNOW mode (depending on certain operating
conditions), the transmission may use SECOND
gear (rather than FIRST gear) during launches,
to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with air
suspension, the default ride height for SNOW is
Normal Ride Height (NRH).
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off-road.
Balances traction with seamless steering feel to
provide improved handling and acceleration
over two-wheel drive vehicles. If equipped with
air suspension, the level will change to Normal
Ride Height (NRH) unless in the Off-Road 1
(OR1) or Off-Road 2 (OR2) position, the height of
OR1 or OR2 will be maintained.
SAND – Off-road calibration for use on low trac-
tion surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Drive-
line is maximized for traction. Some binding may
be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control
management of throttle and wheel spin. If
equipped with air suspension, the default ride
height for SAND is Normal Ride Height (NRH).
MUD – Off-road calibration for use on low trac-
tion surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maxi-
mized for traction. Some binding may be felt on
less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake
controls are set to limit traction control manage-
ment of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with
air suspension, the level will change to OR1.
ROCK – Off-road calibration is only available in
4WD LOW range. The vehicle is raised (if
equipped with Air Suspension) for improved
ground clearance. Traction based tuning with
improved steerability for use on high traction
off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles
such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If equipped
with air suspension, the vehicle level will change
to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain switch is in
ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched
out of 4WD LOW, the Selec-Terrain system will
return to AUTO.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
will appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 74.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions and adjusts
accordingly.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System
Ú page 155.
If the Electric Power Steering warning
icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE
SYSTEM” message is displayed within the
instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service
Ú page 79.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
indicates an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or
pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically
restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded
engine parts, to handle the additional engine
starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver
ignition start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 74.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in DRIVE (D) and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed
in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start
Screen. Situations when the engine will not stop,
include (but not limited to):
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW mode.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
sure.
Engine temperature is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been
achieved from previous Autostop.
Accelerator pedal input.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
Vehicle at a higher altitude.
Ambient temperature is outside operating
range.
Gear selector in MANUAL (M) mode.
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is on and speed
is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system going
into a STOP/START READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically
re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is on and speed
is set.
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “Stop/Start OFF” message will appear in
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section, and the autostop function will be disabled
Ú page 74.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is switched
OFF and back to the ON/RUN position.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 79.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key start.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in
the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Cruise Control is on. To turn the system off, push
the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE
CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push and release the
SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set, a message “CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating the set speed. A cruise indicator lamp,
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident.
Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always ensure the system is off when
you are not using it.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
along with set speed will also appear and stay on
in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control system is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
switch in the OFF position erases the set speed
from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from
memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function
performs differently
Ú page 110.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC
utilizes a radar sensor and a forward-facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead
of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
sion Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the feature selected
Ú page 321.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for two seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that
the brakes must be applied manually.
An audible chime will sound when the
brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display shows the current
ACC system settings. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
tions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
When ESC Full Off mode is active
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed
Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
be controlling the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accel-
erator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the
ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always ensure the system
is off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system
will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no
alarm will sound even if you are too close to the
vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the
system will cancel. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or
SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active:
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the
vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster display will show the ACC Set With Target
Detected Light. The system will then adjust vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the distance set by
the driver until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 113.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs,
a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument
cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC
continues to apply its maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the
left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if
the vehicle ahead starts moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. The driver must now manually
operate the vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. The driver
must now manually operate the vehicle’s
accelerator and brakes.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
the above message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow,
or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an authorized
dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or after-
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or
ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/
FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and
forward-facing camera inspected at an authorized
dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected.
Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will
resume your original set speed. This is a part of
normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on
hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
following lane changing example, ACC has not yet
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not
detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a
vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following exits
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the Park-
Sense switch. The driver can also override auto-
matic braking by shifting out of REVERSE or by
pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity
during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if ESC is not
available.
Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle
is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is
a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
Park Assist system or the Braking System
Module.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough
to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/
or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
tion state for the automatic braking function
through ignition cycles.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
gear.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 125.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display
warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed
exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (there may only be four,
depending on the vehicle options), located in the
rear fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense
sensors located in the front fascia/bumper
(if equipped), monitor the area in front and behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The front sensors detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. These distances depend
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or
rear regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
object, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from
a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(Center Arc Only)
Slow
(Center Arc Only)
Slow
(Center Arc Only)
Fast
(Center Arc Only)
Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect system Ú page 155.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
within the Uconnect system Ú page 155.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 74. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector
is moved to the DRIVE position, no warning
message will be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
the system requires service, the ParkSense switch
LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the
front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning
properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE
OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate
is in the open position. An opened liftgate could
provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a
proper parking space, providing audible/visual
instructions, and controlling the steering wheel.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector
and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle
into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on
either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding
objects, and must intervene as required.
The system is designed to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the
driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain,
snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space
that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic
sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have at
least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to
the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to
improve the performance of the feature. The
system will also continuously perform the
dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differ-
ences such as over or under inflated tires and
new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system
(LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn
off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking space
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the parking
space
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
Steering wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space
ParkSense Park Assist switch is pushed
Driver's door is opened
Rear liftgate is opened
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention
4WD Low is active or activated
SAND mode (if equipped) is active or activated
MUD mode (if equipped) is active or activated
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within the maximum amount of shifts, the system
will cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
NOTE:
The number of shifts will vary between two move-
ments (for large parking spots) and eight move-
ments (for small parking spots).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE
Ignition is in the RUN position
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated
Driver's door is closed
Rear liftgate is closed
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle
is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h),
the system will cancel. The driver must then reac-
tivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch.
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will turn off if any of the preceding
conditions are not present.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press
OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. Push the
OK button on the left side of the steering wheel to
change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to
parallel parking if you desire.
Switch To Perpendicular
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular
parking maneuver, the “Active ParkSense
Searching - Press OK to switch to Parallel”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Switch To Parallel
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of the
vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free
and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
be overhanging or protruding into the parking
space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The system will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple
available parking spaces, the system will only
indicate the last detected parking space for the
maneuver). There must be a vehicle on either
side of the open parking space in order for the
system to detect it.
When an available parking space has been found,
and the vehicle is not in position, you will be
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle
for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence
(depending on the type of maneuver being
performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel. When
the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still
removed from the steering wheel), you will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
(Continued)
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to
check the vehicle’s surroundings, and move
backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE)
while keeping hands off of the steering wheel will
be instructed to the driver while checking the
vehicle’s surroundings before completing the
parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking position,
then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message
“Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position” will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the semi-automatic
parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to remove
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
should check their surroundings and begin to
back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within eight shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
The system will provide a warning to the driver
at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down.
The driver is then responsible for completing the
maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver
for any reason, the driver must take control of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in
front of you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied),
the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel
to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out of
the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides
visual warnings through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane. When only a single lane marking is detected,
a haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on,
push the LaneSense button (LED turns off).
A “LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly be discon-
nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result
in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to
the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING!
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in
order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
CAUTION!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the
LaneSense telltale is solid white when only
the left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if a lane departure
occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/
off) and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected.
The LaneSense telltale is solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the
system is on to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display and a torque warning
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
Lanes Detected With White Lines/Green Telltale
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed With Solid Yellow Line/
Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/
off). The LaneSense telltale changes from
solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system Ú page 155.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with the use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds this
note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
(Continued)
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Controls button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 155.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the
following conditions occur: The vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position, or the user presses image defeat X to
exit out of the camera video display.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with
parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different
colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle. The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
Rear View Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE the Rear View Camera can be
activated with the Back Up Camera
button in the Controls menu. This feature
allows the customer to monitor the area directly
behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to
10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle speed
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View
Camera image will be displayed continuously until
deactivated via the X button on the touchscreen.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
CAUTION!
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located under the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice
buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors
while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR
R
ELEASE
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use
the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to
the center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab the popped up outboard edge with other
hand to disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door,
push the release cable back to the home
position to re-seat the fuel door latch to the
closed position.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Release Cable
NOTE:
If the fuel door does not latch after the use of the
manual release cable, the actuator latch should be
manually returned to the closed position.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on
this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of
manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear GAWR. Total
load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over the front and rear
axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as
appropriate until the specified weight limitations
are met. Store the heavier items down low and be
sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 135.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 135.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by
applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They
are typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle
and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance
with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier TW and may be required
depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/
loading to comply with GAWR requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride
height.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine run position
with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for
proper leveling of the air suspension system.
2. Position the vehicle to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
3. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, using the touchscreen radio
settings, enable tire jack mode. Tire jack mode
will be canceled and procedure must be
restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds
above 5mph (8 km/h).
4. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground;
this is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground;
this is height H2.
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
8. Use the touchscreen radio settings and switch
off tire jack mode. Make sure the truck returns
to normal ride height. Perform a visual
inspection of the trailer and weight distributing
hitch to confirm the manufacturers’
recommendations have been met.
9. The vehicle can now be driven.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW mode engaged (if equipped).
Measurement
Example
Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
For the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain see Ú page 140.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire and Loading Information placard Ú page 291. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and GTW.
Engine Frontal Area Maximum GTW
Maximum Trailer TW
(See Note)
3.6L - 4x2 (Std Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
3.6L - 4x4 (Std Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
3.6L - 4x2 (HD Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
3.6L - 4x4 (HD Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
R
EMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch
receiver cover, this must be removed to access the
trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch
receiver cover is located at the bottom center of
the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the
bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter
turn counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the
locking retainer if needed for added leverage.
Hitch Receiver Cover
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards
you), pull downwards to disengage the tabs
located at the top of the hitch receiver cover.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing
repeat the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to
side which will cause loss of control of the
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle
Ú page 296.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
Servicing Ú page 257. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating or
Gross Combined Weight Rating.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
CAUTION!
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 291.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
TOW mode (if equipped), or use the AutoStick shift
control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using TOW mode (if equipped), or selecting a lower
gear (using the AutoStick shift control) while oper-
ating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle
speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle
speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
A flat tow electric power steering enable kit is available for increased flat tow performance, contact an authorized dealer for further details.
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 103.
If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific straps
(not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD Low
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4WD Low
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in
N (NEUTRAL)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal
Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA-TRAC I (SINGLE-SPEED
T
RANSFER CASE) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
M
ODELS
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models
do not have a N (NEUTRAL) position in the transfer
case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA–TRAC II/QUADRA–DRIVE II
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The transfer case must be shifted into N
(NEUTRAL) and the transmission must be in PARK
(P) for recreational towing. The N (NEUTRAL)
selection button is adjacent to the transfer case
selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case
N (NEUTRAL) can take place with the selector
switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
to the transfer case.
The transmission must be in PARK for recre-
ational towing.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into N (NEUTRAL)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or are no
longer met during the shift, then the N
(NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until
the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift
air suspension, the engine should be
started and left running for a minimum of
60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
temperature effects.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
switch) for four seconds. The light behind the
N symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress.
The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when
the shift to N (NEUTRAL) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message
will appear in the instrument cluster.
Before recreational towing, perform the proce-
dure outlined under “Shifting into N
(NEUTRAL)” to be certain that the transfer
case is fully in N (NEUTRAL). Otherwise,
internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow
bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to
internal parts.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
N (NEUTRAL) Button
6. After the shift is completed and the N
(NEUTRAL) light stays on, release the N
(NEUTRAL) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in
NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE START/
STOP button until the engine turns off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK.
Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn the
ignition to the off position.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of N (NEUTRAL)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the N
(NEUTRAL) button, and must continue to be
met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met
before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or
are no longer met during the shift, the N
(NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until
the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
N (NEUTRAL) Button
7. When the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light turns off,
release the N (NEUTRAL) button. After the N
(NEUTRAL) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated
by the selector switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
engine off.
9. Release the brake pedal.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE,
release the brake pedal, and check that the
vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give
them a higher center of gravity than conventional
passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for cornering at
the same speeds as conventional passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
NOTE:
Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit models
that are also equipped with an Off-Road Package,
remove the lower fascia to prevent damage. The
lower fascia is attached to the lower part of the
front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and
can be removed by hand. The front license plate
bracket must be removed first (if equipped).
Front Air Dam
NOTE:
On Summit models the lower front fascia is not
removable.
Lower Front Fascia Removal:
1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners.
2. Starting on one side of the vehicle, disengage
lower fascia from the upper fascia. Grab the
portion inside the wheel well. Pulling it
downwards and toward you, separate the tabs
from the slots in the upper fascia.
3. Continue working your way across the vehicle,
separating the remaining tabs from the slots in
the upper fascia.
NOTE:
Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from
the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to lower
and upper fascia may result.
4. Store the lower fascia in a safe location.
NOTE:
It is recommend to also remove the radar sensor
on vehicles equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC). This radar sensor is specifically calibrated to
your vehicle and is not interchangeable with other
radar sensors.
Radar Sensor Removal Procedure (If Equipped
With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. With the lower fascia removed, which
provides access to the sensor and bracket,
disconnect the wiring harness from the
sensor.
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire clip
from the bracket.
NOTE:
Before the next step, it is recommended to scribe
location to assist in reinstallation.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the two fasteners
that hold the sensor bracket to the bumper
beam.
4. Locate the protective connector on the rear of
the bumper beam.
Bumper Beam
NOTE:
Only models with the Off-Road Package are
equipped with a protective connector.
5. Remove the plug from the protective
connector and install on the sensor.
6. Insert the wiring harness connector into the
protective connector.
7. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place.
NOTE:
All Speed Control functions will be disabled when
the radar sensor is disconnected.
Radar Sensor Installation Procedure (If Equipped
With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector
from the protective connector on the bumper
beam.
2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install in
protective connector.
3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall
the radar sensor and bracket using the two
fasteners.
NOTE:
Some alignment may be required upon fascia
installation to align sensor with fascia.
4. Install the wiring harness connector into the
radar sensor.
NOTE:
If you receive a fault, see an authorized dealer.
They may need to perform a sensor alignment.
Lower Front Fascia Installation
NOTE:
This will only work if you have a helper.
1. Starting at the center of the vehicle, engage a
sufficient number of tabs to support the
weight of the lower fascia (typically one or
two tabs) into the upper fascia.
2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs
into the slots on one side of the vehicle.
3. Return to the center of the vehicle and repeat
Step 2 to the opposite side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to apply additional
force to individual tabs to make sure they
are fully engaged.
Do not use any tools to apply additional
force to the tabs as damage to the upper
and lower fascias may result.
4. Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners.
1 — Inside Bumper Beam
2 — Protective Connector Location
3 — Sensor Bracket Fasteners
4 — Sensor Bracket
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the
lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the
current obstacle or terrain be selected. The vehicle
height should then be raised as required by the
changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain system will automatically change
the vehicle to the optimized height based on the
Selec-Terrain switch position. The vehicle height
can be changed from the default height for each
Selec-Terrain mode by normal use of the air
suspension switches Ú page 101.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range —
If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or
sand where additional low speed pulling power is
needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW
range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that
must be considered before entering the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small
rivers or streams. To maintain optimal perfor-
mance of your vehicle's heating and ventilation
system it is recommended to switch the system
into recirculation mode during water fording.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
If you must drive through water, try to determine
the depth and the bottom condition (and location
of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to
minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level
recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you
must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of
9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can erode the
streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum
speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD LOW on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW locks
front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to
rear driveshafts. Driving in 4WD LOW on
pavement will cause driveline binding; use only
on wet or slippery surfaces.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil,
transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure the
fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated
fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) should be
flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent
component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 101. Only
shift into a lower gear to maintain forward motion.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding and
loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission
to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to
4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very
steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to
a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart
the engine, and shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly
down the hill, allowing the compression braking of
the engine to help regulate your speed. If the
brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply
them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill.
Always drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest
of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly.
This may provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and
will usually provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill
Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid
repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or
Selec-Speed Control use the following procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the
transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle
go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning
against engine compression drag. This will permit
you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by
downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may
result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always
back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE
gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the brake.
4
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
155
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/
4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a
security breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media devices
(e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer immediately.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On The Faceplate And
Buttons On The Touchscreen
For Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
Only one area of the touchscreen may be
selected at a time.
When making a selection, press one button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired mode, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, either
press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the X button
on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the available settings.
NOTE:
Availability of settings, setting names, and menu
options can vary depending on vehicle features,
equipped Uconnect system, and the currently
installed software.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
MULTIMEDIA 159
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will display SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts on the radio.
Setting Name Description
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 MULTIMEDIA
Units
Voice
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display
in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement
independently.
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system.
The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
MULTIMEDIA 161
Clock
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Setting Name Description
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time
to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-”
setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
Safety/Assistance
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
When the Safety/Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will
differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select
the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
MULTIMEDIA 163
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply brake pressure when
a collision is detected.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane
departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide either an audible chime or a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
This setting will provide braking assist if the Rear ParkSense system senses a
collision with an object.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Power Steering Default
This setting will adjust the power steering modes. Setting options are
“Normal”, “Sport”, and “Comfort”.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Setting Name Description
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE.
Setting Name Description
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold the side mirrors. Setting options are “On”
and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
MULTIMEDIA 165
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the
Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the
Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
MULTIMEDIA 167
Seats & Comfort
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature
(Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert This setting will allow you to turn the Power Liftgate on or off.
Setting Name Description
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has
been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine
is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto-On Heated Seat & Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier entry and
exit of the vehicle.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
MULTIMEDIA 169
Suspension
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s suspension system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier entry and
exit. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages within the Instrument Cluster
Display. Selectable options are “All” and “Warning Only”.
Tire Jack Mode
This setting will disable the suspension system to prevent auto leveling when
the vehicle is on a jack for changing a tire and while setting up trailer weight
distribution bars. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Transport Mode
This setting will disable the suspension system for when the vehicle is being
flat towed. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Wheel Alignment Mode
This setting will disable the suspension system for when the vehicle is having
wheel alignment service. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
MULTIMEDIA 171
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following settings
are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and
“Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Projection Manager
This setting will activate your smartphone to project on the vehicle’s
touchscreen.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
Accessibility
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be
used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a separate subscription.
When pressing the Accessibility button of the touchscreen, the system will display the option related to the vehicle’s theater system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Video Button Readback
This setting will announce a function prior to performing the action selected
when using DVD/Blu-ray™ functions. For example, when activated, and the
Play button is selected, the system will announce “Play Button Selected”, and
then once pressed again, the Play button will perform its action.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
Reset
System Information
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 MULTIMEDIA
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System (if
equipped) plays your favorite CDs, DVDs or
Blu-ray™ Discs and enables you to listen to audio
over the wireless headphones or plug and play a
variety of video games or audio devices.
GETTING STARTED
1. Lift the LCD screen located in the rear of the
front seats.
RSE System Screen
2. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC
position.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Blu-ray™ disc player, the icon
will be present on the player.
3. Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system
by pushing the power button on the remote
control.
NOTE:
When the Video Screen(s) are open and a
DVD/Blu-ray™ disc is inserted into the disc
player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automati-
cally, the headphones turn on, and playback
begins.
RSE System Channel 1
With the Video Screen system, Channel 1 on
the remote control and headphones refers
to Screen 1 (driver's side), and Channel 2 on
the remote control and headphones refers
to Screen 2 (passenger’s side). The remote
control and headphones channel 1 and 2
refer to screen 1 (driver’s side) and screen
2 (passenger’s side).
The system can be controlled either by the front
seat occupants utilizing the touchscreen or by
the rear seat occupants using the remote
control.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
MULTIMEDIA 175
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
VIDEO SCREEN
NOTE:
Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment
system:
The Remote Control
The Uconnect system touchscreen
PLAY A BLU-RAY™ DISC
The Blu-ray™ disc player is located in the center
console.
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Location
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc into the disc player with
the label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray™
player. The radio automatically selects the
appropriate mode after the disc is recognized
and displays the menu screen, the language
screen, or starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a Blu-ray™ disc on Channel 1 for
driver's side rear passengers, ensure the
remote control and headphone switches are
on Channel 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray™ disc on Channel 2 for
passenger side rear passenger’s, ensure the
remote control and headphone switches are
on Channel 2.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
To view a Blu-ray™ disc on the radio, press the
Media button on the touchscreen, and then
press the Disc button. Press the Play button,
and then the Full Screen button.
Viewing a Blu-ray™ disc on the front radio
screen is not available in all states/provinces.
To view the disc, the vehicle must be stopped,
and the gear selector must be in the PARK posi-
tion.
Using The Front Touchscreen Radio
Rear Media Control Screen
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
1/Channel 1. This button will be highlighted
when it is being controlled by the front user.
If this button is not highlighted, press the but-
ton to access controls for Screen 1/Channel 1
source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition
cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear
headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock-Out
Press to enable/disable remote control func-
tions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/
Channel 2. This button will be highlighted
when it is being controlled by the front user. If
this button is not highlighted, press the button
to access controls for Screen 2/Channel 2
source.
6. RSE Source
Press this button to change the source for the
active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on
the Rear Media Control screen.
7. Radio Full Screen Mode
Press this button to change to Full Screen
Mode.
8. Cabin Audio Mode
Press this button to change the cabin audio to
the rear entertainment source currently shown
on the Rear Media Control screen.
Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and
then press the Rear Media button on the touch-
screen.
Press the OK button on the touchscreen to
begin playing the Blu-ray™ disc.
Using The Remote Control
Select an audio channel (Channel 1 and
Channel 2), and then press the source key.
Using the Up and Down arrows, highlight Disc
from the menu and press the OK button.
Press the pop-up/menu key to navigate the disc
menu and options.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
MULTIMEDIA 177
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote
Control.
2. While looking at Channel 1 or 2, highlight DISC
by pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then
push ENTER/OK.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen
Using The Touchscreen Controls
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect
system touchscreen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the
Rear Media Control Screen.
Rear Media Control Screen
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen,
then the Select Source button on the
touchscreen. Press the Disc button on the
touchscreen in the Media column. To exit,
press the X at the top right of the screen.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
NOTE:
Pressing the screen on the Uconnect system while
a DVD or Blu-ray™ Disc is playing brings up the
basic remote control functions for DVD or Blu-ray™
Disc play such as Scene Selection, Play, Pause, FF,
RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to the Audio/
Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of
each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI jacks (AUX/HDMI jacks)
on the side of each seat enable the monitor to
display video directly from a video camera, connect
video games for display on the screen, or play
music directly from an MP3 player.
Audio/Video Connector Ports/HDMI Input Jacks
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 MULTIMEDIA
When connecting an external source to the AUX/
HDMI input, be sure to follow the standard color
coding (numbers 1-3) for the audio/video jacks:
1. Right audio in (red)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Video in (yellow)
4. HDMI Input
NOTE:
Certain video game consoles may exceed the
power limit of the vehicle's power inverter.
For more information about power inverters,
Ú page 60.
IMPORTANT NOTES FOR THE VIDEO
S
CREEN SYSTEM
The Rear Seat Entertainment system is able to
transmit two channels of stereo audio and video
simultaneously.
The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs,
and Blu-ray™ Discs.
Selecting a video source on either Channel 1 or
Channel 2 will display video and allow you to
hear it on each respective channel.
Audio can be heard through the headphones
even when the screen(s) are closed.
BLU-RAY™ DISC PLAYER REMOTE
C
ONTROL
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. — To hear audio while the screen is closed,
push the Power button to turn the headphone
transmitter on; turns the screen and wireless
headphone transmitter for the selected
Channel on or off.
2. — Push to navigate menus.
3. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
4. — Push to navigate menus.
5. — Push to navigate menus.
6. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to
source selection screen.
7. — Mutes headphone audio.
8. — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
9. — Stops disc play.
10. — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
11. — When a button is pushed, the current
channel or channel button is illuminated
momentarily.
12. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection
screen.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
MULTIMEDIA 179
13. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates
which channel is being controlled by the
remote control. When the selector switch is in
the Channel 1 position, the remote controls
the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left
screen). When the selector switch is in the
Channel 2 position, the remote controls the
functionality of headphone Channel 2 (right
screen).
14. — Push to navigate menus.
15. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings
menu.
16. — Push and hold to fast forward through
the current audio track or video chapter.
17. — Begin/resume or pause disc play.
18. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access
Blu-ray™ Disc features.
19. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and
shuffle options, the Blu-ray™ Disc pop-up
menu, the DVD title menu, or to access disc
menus.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
The headphones receive two separate channels of
audio using an infrared transmitter from the video
screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume
control, verify that the screen is turned on, the
channel is not muted, and the headphone channel
selector switch is on the desired channel. If audio is
still not heard, check that the batteries are charged.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
CONTROLS
The headphone power indicator and controls are
located on the right ear cup.
NOTE:
The rear video system must be turned on
before sound can be heard from the headphones.
To conserve battery life, the headphones will auto-
matically turn off approximately three minutes
after the rear video system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen
selector switch is in the same position as the
headphone selector switch.
NOTE:
When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 1, the Remote is controlling
Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio on Channel 1.
When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 2, the remote is controlling
Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote
control to advance to the next mode.
3. When the Mode Selection menu appears on
screen, use the cursor buttons on the remote
control to navigate to the available modes and
push the OK button to select the new mode.
4. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu,
push the Back button on the remote control.
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 MULTIMEDIA
REPLACING THE HEADPHONE
B
ATTERIES
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries
for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left
ear cup of the headphones, and then slide the
battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Return the battery compartment cover.
ACCESSIBILITY — IF EQUIPPED
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray™
system that announces a function prior to
performing the action Ú page 155.
STEREO HEADPHONE LIFETIME LIMITED
W
ARRANTY
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser ("you" or "your") of this
particular Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”) wireless headphone
("Product"). The warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty
lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as
specified, this warranty covers any Product that in
normal use is defective in workmanship or
materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results
from misuse, abuse, or modification of the Product
other than by Aptiv. Foam earpieces, which will
wear over time through normal use, are specifically
not covered (replacement foam is available for a
nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY
INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY
FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS
APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states
and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages,
so the above limitation may not apply to you. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction
to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair or
replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the
right to replace any discontinued Product with a
comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH
YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING
DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED),
INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding
your Aptiv wireless headphones, please email
[email protected] or phone: 888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc,
pushing the remote control’s POP-UP/MENU
button displays a list of all commands which
control playback of the disc.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray™ Disc or
DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video,
etc.), pushing the remote control’s SETUP button
activates the Display Settings menu. These
settings control the appearance of the video on the
screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change
these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s
Navigation buttons to select an item, then push the
remote control’s Navigation buttons to change the
value for the currently selected item.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
To reset all values back to the original settings,
select the Default Settings menu option and push
the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray™ Disc
player's settings of DVD being watched in the
remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only the audio portion of the channel
with the screen closed:
Set the audio to the desired source and
channel.
Close the video screen.
To change the current audio mode, push the
remote control’s SOURCE button. This will auto-
matically select the next available audio mode
without using the Mode/Source Select menu.
When the screen is reopened, the video screen
will automatically turn back on and show the
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard,
verify that the headphones are turned on (the ON
indicator is illuminated) and the headphone
selector switch is on the desired channel. If the
headphones are turned on, push the remote
control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing the
following types of 4.7-inch (12 centimeter)
diameter discs:
BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray™ Disc player and many DVD discs are
coded by geographic region. These region codes
must match in order for the disc to play. If the
region code for the DVD/Blu-ray™ disc does not
match the region code for the player, the disc will
not play.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray™
Disc player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is
played by default (most DVD-Audio discs also have
a Video title, but the Video title is ignored). All
multichannel program material is automatically
mixed down to two channels, which may result in a
lowered apparent volume level. If you increase the
volume level to account for this change in level,
remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray™ Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW
discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or
as a CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The
player will also play DVD-Video content recorded to
a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either
pressed or recorded) are not supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer,
there may be cases where the Blu-ray™ Disc player
may not be able to play some or the entire disc,
even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is
playable on other players. To help avoid playback
problems, use the following guidelines when
recording discs:
Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that
are closed are playable.
For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple
CD-Audio sessions, the player will renumber the
tracks so each track number is unique.
For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo
format. Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or
others) are not supported.
The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files
and 99 folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only
play the Video_TS portion of the disc.
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the Blu-ray™ Disc player, check with the
disc recording software publisher for more
information about burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable
discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a
permanent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as
they may separate from the disc, become stuck,
and cause permanent damage to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW).
The Blu-ray™ Disc player always uses the file
extension to determine the audio format, so
MP3 files must always end with the extension
“.mp3” or “.MP3” and WMA files must always
end with the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”. To
prevent incorrect playback, do not use these
extensions for any other types of files.
For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such
as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are
supported.
Any file that is copy protected (such as those
downloaded from many online music stores) will
not play. The Blu-ray™ player will automatically
skip the file and begin playing the next available
file.
Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3
Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The
Blu-ray™ player will automatically skip the file
and begin playing the next available file.
If you are creating your own files, the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between
96 and 192 Kbps and the recommended fixed
bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and
192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also supported.
For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
To change the current file, use the remote
control’s or Blu-ray™ Disc player’s button to
advance to the next file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the
disc, a “Disc Error” message is displayed on the
rear screen and Uconnect system displays. A dirty,
damaged, or incompatible disc format are all
potential causes for a “Disc Error” message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in
audible or visible errors that persists for two
seconds, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will attempt to
continue playing the disc by skipping forward one
to three seconds at a time. If the end of the disc is
reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will return to the
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start
of the first track.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during
extremely hot conditions, such as when the
vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F
(48.9°C). When this occurs, the player will display
“High Temp” and will shut off the rear seat displays
until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown
is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray™
Disc player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by US patents and
other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home or other limited viewing uses otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP Lossless",
and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished
works. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories.
All rights reserved.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
The level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 321.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages,
which provides the vehicle status while operating
on off-road conditions. It supplies information
relating to the vehicle ride height, the status of the
transfer case, the pitch and roll of the vehicle, and
the active Selec-Terrain mode.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button
on the touchscreen, and then select “Off-Road
Pages”.
Main Menu
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
Vehicle Dynamics
Suspension
Pitch & Roll — If Equipped
Accessory Gauge
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of
the five selectable page options. It provides
continually updating information for the following
items:
1. Current Transfer Case Status (only appears
when in 4WD LOW)
2. Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped
3. Current Latitude/Longitude
4. Current Altitude of the vehicle
5. Status of Hill Descent
6. Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in
mph (km/h)
Status Bar
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
1 — Transfer Case Status (Only When In 4WD LOW)
2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped
3 — Current Latitude/Longitude
4 — Current Altitude
5 — Hill Descent
6 — Selec-Speed Status And Set Speed
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
SUSPENSION
The Suspension page displays information
regarding the vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
1. Suspension Articulation Indicator
2. Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped
Normal
Off-Road 1
Off-Road 2
Entry/Exit
Aero
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by a
yellow color in the Suspension Articulation Indi-
cator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride Height
Indicator on the screen will switch to the appro-
priate height and the Suspension Articulation Indi-
cator will show the movement and change in
height.
Suspension Menu
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
1 — Suspension Articulation Indicator
2 — Current Ride Height
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
5
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only),
Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will alter
the image on the screen. The vehicle must be in
the ON/RUN position to display Selec-Terrain
information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
Auto — Default
Snow
Sand
Mud
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD LOW
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road
Pages Status Bar will also display the current
Selec-Terrain mode.
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Transmission Temperature
5 — Battery Voltage
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
187
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound, as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC),
Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support
(RBS), Selec-Speed Control (SSC) and Trailer Sway
Control (TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules
that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module
is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the
steering wheel receives is only meant to help the
driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only
notification the driver receives that the feature is
active is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small
torques on the steering wheel, which means the
effectiveness of the DST feature is highly
dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall
reaction to the applied torque. It is very important
to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid
vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking
objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). See Ú page 189 for a
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to
return to “ESC On”.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road
driving while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills
during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the
brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable
HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The
set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The
following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – if equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre-
sponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback
to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
activated. This is the normal operating condition
for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable condi-
tions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
flashing will stop and HDC will activate again
once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
safe vehicle speed.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting using the Uconnect
Settings, see Ú page 155.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS
is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
Control (EBC) system will prepare the brake system
for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in
4WD Low only. SSC maintains vehicle
speed by actively controlling engine
torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed)
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable
SSC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically
once the following conditions are met:
The driver releases the throttle.
The driver releases the brake.
The transmission is in any selection other
than PARK.
The vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver,
and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-.
Additionally, the SSC set speed may be reduced
when climbing a grade and the level of set speed
reduction depends on the magnitude of grade.
The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – if equipped
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC
target speed selection but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. While actively
controlling SSC the transmission will shift appro-
priately for the driver-selected set speed and
corresponding driving conditions.
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive
mode if active. The differences may be notable
to the driver as a varying level of aggressive-
ness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle
or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or
brake application
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
Vehicle is shifted to PARK
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the
driver about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
activated. This is the normal operating condition
for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the SSC switch but enable conditions
are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to over-
heated brakes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations
Ú page 136.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.)
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in off
road conditions. The driver must remain
attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side of the
vehicle, near the B-pillar, and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors
the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver
of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in random
false detections on the trailer, and false chimes
when the turn signal is used.
The BSM system may experience drop outs
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror warning
indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small
object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors
are located. The system may also detect blockage
if the vehicle is operated in areas with extremely
low radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a
“Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The
system will automatically recover and resume
function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
light located in the outside mirrors. In addition,
when the turn signal is activated during the alert on
the side of the vehicle corresponding to the alert,
an audible (chime) alert can be heard. During this
audible (chime) alert, the radio volume will be
reduced. See Ú page 199 in this section for
further information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes Ú page 321.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is a feature that is intended to aid the driver
when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked.
Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking
space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio
(if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or
RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings and
may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does
not take action based upon these progressive
warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the
collision by braking but has not applied sufficient
brake force, the system will compensate and
provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the
system may provide the maximum or partial
braking to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles, such as guardrails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within an ignition cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings. If the
vehicle enters 4WD Low or ESC “Full Off” mode
is active, the FCW system will be automatically
deactivated Ú page 321.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 155.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the driver
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings and it applies
autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warning when the latter is at a farther
distance than "Medium" setting. This provides the
most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front when the distance
between the vehicle in the front is much closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the
audible and visual warnings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven
— this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 291 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
warning threshold for any reason, including low
temperature effects, or natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
recommended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire
pressure must be increased to the recommended
cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
(Continued)
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure
is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the
tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be
on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off only after the tires have been inflated to
the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel
rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly check
the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure Ú page 321.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures
TPMS Warning Light
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warnings have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
able system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to
have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System sensor.
CAUTION!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated, when one or
more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message and
a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the
low tire(s) in a different color.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units in
PSI, BAR, or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a
different color on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will return to its
original color and the TPMS Warning Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have
been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on
solid when a system fault is detected. The system
fault will also sound a chime. The instrument
cluster display will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds.
This message is then followed by a graphic display,
with “- -“ in place of the pressure value(s),
indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer
flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur by any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors
NOTE:
There is no Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able
to monitor the tire pressure. If you install the spare
tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will remain on, a chime will
sound, and the instrument cluster display will still
display a pressure value in the different color
graphic display and an “Inflate to XX” message will
be displayed. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the instrument cluster display
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value. For each subsequent
ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the instrument cluster display will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value. Once you repair or replace the
original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update auto-
matically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster display will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such
as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure
values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition
cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Supplemental Active Head Restraints
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 221.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 221.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 318 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/
RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
(Continued)
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
WARNING!
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly
causing internal injuries. Always buckle your
seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system Ú page 221.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints
(AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings, only
through visual inspection of the head restraint. The
head restraint will be split in two halves, with the
front half being soft foam and trim, the back half
being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the severity or type of rear
impact will require the Active Head Restraints
(AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires
deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front
half of the head restraint extends forward to
minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain
types of rear impacts.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not
deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However, if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the
severity and type of the impact.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, see Ú page 34.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a
collision, the front half of the head restraint will be
extended forward and separated from the rear half
of the head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your
vehicle after the AHRs have deployed. The head
restraint must be reset into the original position to
best protect the occupant for all types of collisions.
An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must reset the
AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
before driving. Personally attempting to reset the
AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs that could
impair their function.
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Seat Back
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a collision.
Do not place items over the top of the Active
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or
portable DVD players. These items may inter-
fere with the operation of the Active Head
Restraint in the event of a collision and could
result in serious injury or death.
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental
deployment of the Active Head Restraint,
ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose
cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you
in all types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs
reset by an authorized dealer immediately.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
(Continued)
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately Ú page 79.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
(Continued)
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine. After an accident, if the vehicle will not
start after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer to
be inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System reset.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-care-
givers
or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death.
A child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SAFETY 225
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints
In This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SAFETY 227
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use
the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the
outboard seating positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraint may be removed in only the center
seating position if it interferes with the installation of the
child restraint Ú page 34.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat. To
access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose the
top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. See
Ú page 229 for typical installation instruc-
tions.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the
center seat position with the vehicle seat belts, the
rear center seat position has an armrest tether
that secures the arm rest in the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,
first lower the arm rest. The tether is located
behind the armrest and hooked onto the
plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the
plastic seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook
to the strap located on the front of the arm
rest.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 230 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 232 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
(Continued)
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 210 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up
to the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back
of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraint may be removed in only the
center seating position if it interferes with the
installation of the child restraint Ú page 34.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 232 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See Ú page 226 for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest
then attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 88.
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until
the gap panel is folded down. Do not use the
visible cargo tie down hooks, located on the
floor behind the seats, to attach a child
restraint tether anchor.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
(Continued)
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have ques90tions regarding the seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified
Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN mode. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 204.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners.
DO NOT install your floor mat upside
down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SAFETY
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING!
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SAFETY 237
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
6
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the switch bank just above the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains a SOS
and an ASSIST button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 321.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a
built in function. Other Uconnect services will
only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™
service is active and you are connected to an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you
will be connected to a representative for assis-
tance. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the rearview Mirror or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the rearview Mirror will turn
green once a connection to a SOS operator has
been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed.
Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants
and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
to remain connected with the SOS operator
until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The rearview Mirror light located between the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be
illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact
an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
tion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data
Ú page 321 as authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rear-
view Mirror light is illuminated, have an autho-
rized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
7
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, to disable
the automatic leveling feature Ú page 152.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery surfaces.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the driver’s front tire,
block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in the rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Load Floor
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct
jacking points. Failure to follow this information
could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody
components.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
(Continued)
Spare Tire/Jack And Tools
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE — IF EQUIPPED
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the
rear cargo area and is secured to the body with a
special fastener.
Spare Tire Fastener
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1 — Capless Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Jack
3 — Tire Changing Tools
4 — Spare Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
7
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
storage. Turn the fastener counterclockwise
to remove the spare tire.
Removing Spare Tire Fastener
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts,
using the lug wrench by turning them counter-
clockwise, one turn, while the wheel is still on
the ground.
Loosen Lug Nuts
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack And Tool Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 245
Placement for the front and rear jacking loca-
tions are critical. See the following images for
proper jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, certain models
come equipped with Rock Rails which have a
different front lifting point location. Also, the trian-
gular symbols are not visible for this trim package.
Front Lifting Point - Rock Rail
NOTE:
The jack must be placed straight on with handle
facing outwards. See the following Front Jacking
Location images for reference. The position of the
front jack is the same for all trim levels.
Front Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location - Rock Rail
7
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the
rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear
tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point
symbol on the sill molding).
Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
NOTE:
The rear lifting point location is the same for all
trim levels.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Lifting Point - Rock Rail
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location - Rock Rail
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill
molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the proper
engagement location on the inside of the panel.
Damage of the vehicle may occur if the
procedure is not properly followed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 247
Mounting Spare Tire
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. For correct lug nut torque Ú page 312.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
Tighten Lug Nuts
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
12. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and
return it and the tools to the proper positions
in the foam tray.
13. Remove the small center cap and securely
store the road wheel in the cargo area. Turn
the fastener clockwise until secured.
Installing Fastener
14. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible, properly secure
the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued
to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall the jack and tool
kit foam tray, and latch the rear load floor
cover.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more
than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
7
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
passenger's front seat. There are remote battery
posts located under the hood to assist in jump
starting.
Remote Jump Starting Post Locations
See the following steps to prepare for jump
starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap
over the remote positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system
may occur.
Remote Positive (+) Post
(Covered With Protective Cap)
Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles or disconnected cable
ends to touch each other as this could establish
a ground connection and personal injury could
result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 249
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive
(+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper cable to the remote negative
(-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle) located on the right hand
side next to the under-hood fuse box.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, see the following
disconnecting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative
(-)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post
of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote
positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle have the battery and charging system
tested at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
7
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
Ú page 242 for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler
neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with
the funnel to avoid spills.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door using the inside release
button. Do not pry on the door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
Refueling Funnel
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 251
In the event it is observed that the temperature
gauge is moving towards or close to the HOT (H)
position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
See the following steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the
Manual Park Release cover, remove it by
snapping the cover away from the console
hinges.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the
metal latch in towards the tether strap.
Releasing Latch
5. While the metal latch is in the open position,
pull upward on the tether strap until the lever
clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK (P) and the
vehicle can be moved.
Released Position
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally,
firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, apply
tension upward while pushing the release
latch towards the tether to unlock the lever.
Disengaging The Lever
2. Once the tension has been released and the
lever has been unlocked, be sure it is stowed
properly and locks into it’s original position.
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in
place.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park
Release is activated may damage the Manual
Park Release mechanism, the transmission,
and/or the armrest.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 253
(Continued)
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than
two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 189.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
button again to restore ESC On mode.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as
described on Ú page 146.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed
in Transport mode, before tying them down (from
the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 152.
If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode
(for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should
be fastened over the tires using specific tire
tie-down nets. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss
of proper tie-down tension.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
ring).
CAUTION!
7
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions
on shifting the automatic transmission out of
PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle Ú page 251.
NOTE:
4WD models without 4WD Low range should only
be towed with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD Low Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models With
4WD Low Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions Ú page 146
Transmission in PARK (P)
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 255
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed
(with rear wheels on the ground) under the
following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N), for
instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 251.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear
wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods to
tow the vehicle on a flatbed are as follows:
The front wheels raised and the rear wheels on
a towing dolly.
Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold
the front wheels in the straight position with the
rear wheels raised when and the front wheels
ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. An acceptable method is to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles
with a
two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the
forward direction, with
ALL wheels on the ground),
IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
transmission is in
PARK Ú page 146.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore
must be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe trans-
mission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be two mounted in the front fascia/bumper
and one in the rear fascia/bumper. The rear tow
hook will be located on the driver's side of the
vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear tow hook.
The tow hook will be located on the driver's side of
the rear fascia/bumper.
Front Tow Hooks
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
Rear Tow Hook
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 219.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 220.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
257
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km);
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace the engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner
and pulley, replace if necessary.
X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Change transfer case fluid if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, off-road, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
X X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Engine Oil Fill
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate when
the washer fluid level is low. When the sensor
detects a low fluid level, the Low Washer Fluid
Warning Light will illuminate and the “Washer Fluid
Low” message will display.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and
the rear window washer is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment; be
sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only
(not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer
fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it
to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades,
this will help blade performance. To prevent
freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate.
This rating information can be found on most
washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps Ú page 248. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 317.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends
API trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 258.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Spring Clips
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the engine air
cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, the air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Infor-
mation Book, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydroflu-
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 258.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
Glove Compartment
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on
both sides of the glove compartment door,
partially close the glove compartment door
and push inward to release the glove
compartment travel stop on one side and
repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove
compartment door toward the rear of the
vehicle to disengage the glove compartment
door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose,
remove the glove compartment tension tether
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
face of the glove compartment door and lifting
the clip out of glove compartment door.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the
retaining tab and mid way snap that secures
the filter cover to the HVAC housing. Disengage
the mid way snap by pulling the door outward.
Unhinge the filter cover on the right side to fully
remove the cover.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing.
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs
fully engage the cover.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the
door hinge and reattach the tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove
compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to
reengage the glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This is
not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks
running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any
belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically use
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
damaged.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade
and while holding the wiper arm with one
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade toward the right
side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade
from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab
open and the blade side of the wiper facing up
and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is
flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked
position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade
nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With
your left hand, hold the wiper arm as you pull
the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past
its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade
pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the
bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand,
and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper
arm until it snaps into place.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap
the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment.
In addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to the manufacturer specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you
Ú page 234.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
CAUTION!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
(Continued)
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system,
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 258.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 317.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
WARNING!
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be
used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank
(if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested
by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method
for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 258.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid
is abnormally low, check the system for leaks. For
further information Ú page 317.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
WARNING!
Use only the manufacturer recommended
brake fluid Ú page 317. Using the wrong type
of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in an open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check the
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer specified
transmission fluid Ú page 317. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons, the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lb (30 to 40 N·m).
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lb (30 to 40 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid
Ú page 317.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder Ú page 317.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case
assembly should be inspected. If oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
With the vehicle in a level position, fill the transfer
case to bottom edge of fill plug opening.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill
plugs is 15 to 25 ft lb (20 to 34 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid
Ú page 317.
FUSES
General Information
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You
could damage them and cause them to leak.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate-
rial. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use
proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side,
directly behind the headlamp. This center contains
cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit
breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with
water.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 – – Spare
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan *
F04 – – Spare
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
F05 40 Amp Green – Air Suspension Comp *
F06 40 Amp Green – ABS Pump MTR
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F08 – – Spare
F09 30 Amp Pink – VAC Pump *
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / Ext Light
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Brake *
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLWR MTR
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Light
F15 – – Spare
F16 – – Spare
F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer *
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Mod
F21 – – Spare
F22 20 Amp Blue – ECM *
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F25 30 Amp Pink – Ft Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink – ESP / ECU Valves
F27 – – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow B/U *
F29 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow Park *
F30 30 Amp Pink – TRLR Tow Pwr *
F31 – – Spare
F32 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – ELSD *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – EBL
F37 – – Spare
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F39 30 Amp Pink – PLG
F40 – 10 Amp Red DRL / Headlamp LVL *
F41 – – Spare
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – – Spare
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security Mod
F46 – – Spare
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension MOD * / ELSD *
F51 – 15 Amp Blue KIN / RF HUB / ESCL *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow TRLR Tow LT Turn / Stop *
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LT *
F59 – – Spare
F60 – 15 Amp Blue TCM
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils * / Ignition Coil Capacitors *
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / LTR Control / ECM
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F65 – – Spare
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof * / LRSM * / RVM / DSCR / USB Port / DTV *
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CDM / UCI Port / USB Port
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper Mtr
F69 – – Spare
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Mtr
F71 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier * / ANCM *
F72 – 10 Amp Red ECM *
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps RT *
F74 – – Spare
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt CTRL *
F76 – 10 Amp Red ESP
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / ELSD *
F78 – 10 Amp Red ECM / EPS
F79 – – Spare
F80 – 10 Amp Red UGDO / ITM / SIREN
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow TRLR Tow RT Turn / Stop *
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise Control / DTV *
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Susp Mod *
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / CSG */ ITBM *
F89 – – Spare
F90
– 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet–Batt
F91 Power Outlet–ACC
F92 – – Spare
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red SBW / TCASE SW
F95 – 10 Amp Red RR Cam / Blind Spot Snsr *
F96 – 10 Amp Red RR Seat Heater SW *
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD STS / HTD STR WHEEL *
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD STS / Vent STS *
F99 – 10 Amp Red HVAC / DASM / HLFM / PRKTRONX
F100 – – Spare
F101 – 15 Amp Blue IN-Car Temperature Sensor / Humidity Sensor
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – – Spare
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Pwr Out-IP / Console /TRNK
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (Low Beam) — If Equipped H11
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Headlamps (High Beam) — If Equipped H9
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED
Front Fog Lamps LED
Front Side Marker — If Equipped W5W
Premium Front Side Marker — If Equipped LED
Front Park/Turn Lamp — If Equipped 7444NA (WY28/8W)
Rear Body Side Backup Lamp 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps LED
Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED
Rear Body Side Stop/Turn Lamps 3157KRD LCP (P27/7W)
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Bulb Replacement
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HEADLAMPS
(HID) — IF EQUIPPED
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switched off and
the key removed.
Because of this, you should not
attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a
headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue
to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more
white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
system charges.
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to
change back to vapor. Turning the lamps on will
usually accelerate the clearing process.
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
3. The air filter housing must be removed.
4. The windshield washer reservoir may need to
be rotated out of the way by removing the
fastener.
5. Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be
repositioned by removing the fasteners, and
moving the unit out of the way.
6. To access the low beam bulb you must remove
the rubber boot seal from backside of the lamp
housing.
Rubber Boot Seal
NOTE:
Ensure the rubber boot is properly reinstalled to
prevent water and moisture from entering the
lamp.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID
headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or
electrocution if not serviced properly. See an
authorized dealer for service.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
7. Turn the low or high beam bulb a quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
3. The air filter housing must be removed.
4. The windshield washer reservoir may need to
be rotated out of the way by removing the
fastener.
5. Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be
repositioned by removing the fasteners, and
moving the unit out of the way.
6. Turn the turn signal bulb a quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
Please see an authorized dealer for service on LED
and Halogen front fog lamps.
REAR TAIL, STOP, AND TURN SIGNAL LAMPS —
IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp
housing.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
3. Grab the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist socket counterclockwise and remove
from lamp.
Rear Of Tail Lamp
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and
reattach the lamp assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1 — Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Backup Bulb Socket
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
REAR LIFTGATE MOUNTED TAIL LAMP —
IF EQUIPPED
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
See the following steps to replace:
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim from
the liftgate.
Liftgate Lower Trim
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s)
counterclockwise.
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s).
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
The CHMSL is an LED. Service at an authorized
dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
REAR LICENSE LAMP
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See an
authorized dealer for service.
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturers’ recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú page 135.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 135.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision.
Always use radial ply tires in sets of four.
Never combine them with other types of tires.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition Ú page 201.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping Ú page 253.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed Ú page 301. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 292.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 143.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
The wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride,
calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals
used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use
a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away
promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff
brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective
coating that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing the vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive the vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the snow traction
device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER
WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this
is all that is required to maintain this finish.
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond tire
profile or equivalent)
LAREDO
LIMITED
Rear
P265/60R18
265/60R18
265/50R20
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond tire
profile or equivalent)
LAREDO
LIMITED
Rear
P265/60R18
265/60R18
265/50R20
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 258.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The Tire Pressure Monitor System will automati-
cally locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the
“rearward-cross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather it may show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® Total Clean leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
8
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front
corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off)
the brakes will still function. However, the effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should
be torqued using a properly calibrated torque
wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 313
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane
number can cause engine failure and may void the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded regular
gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane premium gasoline is not required, as
it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline
in these engines.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
9
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and not covered
under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
sion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 315
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
9
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 317
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 264.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using Mopar® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. If a Mopar®
Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85
Axle Differential (Rear) We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
9
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. If an
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact FCA US LLC’s Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number
(home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 319
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY users, dial
711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle
delivery date. If you have any questions
about the service contract, call FCA US LLC’s
Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further
information.
For French, refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They are
recommended for your vehicle in order to help
keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free
at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls
at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and are written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 321
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific
FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.........................................312
ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control.........................110
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)........................110
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............274
Adding Fuel....................................................134
Additives, Fuel ...............................................314
Adjust
Forward ....................................................... 32
Rearward..................................................... 32
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................................215
Air Bag Warning Light................................213
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................215
Enhanced Accident Response......... 219, 256
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................256
Front Air Bag .............................................214
If Deployment Occurs................................218
Knee Impact Bolsters................................215
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............220
Maintenance .............................................220
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............214
Side Air Bags .............................................216
Transporting Pets......................................234
Air Bag Light ........................................ 213, 235
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 265
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 266
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 266, 267
Air Conditioner System ................................. 266
Air Conditioning Filter.................... 55, 265, 267
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................55
Air Filter ........................................................ 265
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 299
Alarm
Arm The System ...................................21, 22
Disarm The System .....................................21
Rearm The System ......................................22
Security Alarm ......................................21, 82
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................10
Ambient Light...................................................49
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 273, 316
Disposal ................................................... 275
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 187
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................82
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 192
Audio Systems (Radio).................................. 155
Auto Down Power Windows .............................61
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................61
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................38
Automatic Door Locks......................................25
Automatic Headlights.......................................46
Automatic High Beams.....................................46
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............54
Automatic Transmission............................90, 97
Adding Fluid.............................................. 277
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 277
Fluid Change............................................. 277
Fluid Level Check.............................276, 277
Fluid Type ........................................ 277, 317
Gear Ranges................................................98
Special Additives ...................................... 276
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode......99
AutoPark ..........................................................91
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 195
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........58
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................58
Axle Fluid....................................................... 317
B
Battery ................................................... 80, 263
Charging System Light.................................80
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................15
Battery Saver Feature ......................................48
Belts, Seat .................................................... 235
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
323
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................195
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................269
B-Pillar Location.............................................296
Brake Assist System ......................................188
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................188
Brake Fluid .......................................... 276, 317
Brake System ...................................... 275, 312
Anti-Lock (ABS)..........................................312
Fluid Check ...............................................276
Master Cylinder .........................................276
Parking........................................................94
Warning Light .............................................. 80
Brake/Transmission Interlock ......................... 96
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle....... 94
Bulb Replacement.........................................286
Bulbs, Light....................................................236
C
Camera, Rear ................................................132
Capacities, Fluid ............................................316
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)................................................262
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................274
Car Washes ...................................................309
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................237
Cargo Area Cover...................................... 68, 69
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 68
Cargo Tie-Downs.............................................. 70
Cellular Phone ...............................................183
Certification Label......................................... 135
Chains, Tire................................................... 306
Changing A Flat Tire...................................... 242
Chart, Tire Sizing........................................... 292
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light)............................89
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 234
Checks, Safety .............................................. 234
Child Restraint .............................................. 221
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 224
Child Seat Installation .............................. 232
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 230
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 223
LATCH Positions ....................................... 226
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ... 226
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 223
Seating Positions...................................... 225
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 314
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 305
Climate Control ................................................51
Cold Weather Operation ..................................93
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 303
Console
Storage........................................................56
Console, Overhead...........................................57
Contract, Service .......................................... 319
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)............ 274
Cooling System ............................................. 273
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 274
Coolant Level............................................ 275
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 316
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 275
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 273
Inspection........................................ 273, 275
Points To Remember ................................ 275
Pressure Cap ............................................ 274
Radiator Cap............................................. 274
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze).........................273, 316, 317
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 309
Cruise Light...............................................86, 87
Customer Assistance .................................... 318
Cybersecurity ................................................ 155
D
Daytime Running Lights ...................................45
Dealer Service............................................... 264
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 235
De-Icer, Remote Start ......................................21
Diagnostic System, Onboard............................88
Dimmer Control Switch ....................................49
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 263
Disabled Vehicle Towing ............................... 253
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 275
11
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324
Door Ajar................................................... 80, 81
Door Ajar Light.......................................... 80, 81
Door Locks
Automatic.................................................... 25
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 29
Driving ...........................................................150
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ....174
E
Economy (Fuel) Mode ...................................... 96
Electric Brake Control System .......................188
Anti-Lock Brake System.............................187
Electronic Roll Mitigation................. 189, 195
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................39
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)......... 58
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)......110
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................189
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 81
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ......................250
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck......................253
Hazard Warning Flasher............................238
Jacking ......................................................242
Jump Starting............................................248
Tow Hooks.................................................256
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 89
Engine........................................................... 262
Air Cleaner................................................ 265
Block Heater................................................93
Break-In Recommendations........................94
Checking Oil Level .................................... 263
Compartment ........................................... 262
Compartment Identification...................... 262
Coolant (Antifreeze).................................. 317
Cooling ..................................................... 273
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 237
Fails To Start ...............................................93
Flooded, Starting .........................................93
Fuel Requirements ................................... 313
Jump Starting ........................................... 248
Oil ...........................................264, 316, 317
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 262
Oil Filter .................................................... 265
Oil Reset......................................................75
Oil Selection .................................... 264, 316
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 265
Starting........................................................90
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 219, 256
Ethanol ......................................................... 314
Exhaust Gas Cautions................................... 237
Exhaust System ................................... 237, 272
Exterior Lights.........................................44, 236
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 265
Air Conditioning ........................ 55, 265, 267
Engine Oil ........................................ 265, 317
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 265
Flashers ........................................................ 238
Hazard Warning ........................................ 238
Turn Signals.............................. 87, 236, 289
Flash-To-Pass...................................................46
Flooded Engine Starting...................................93
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 316
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 236
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................ 276
Engine Oil ................................................. 263
Fluid, Brake................................................... 317
Fog Lights ........................................................47
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................29
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 199
Four Wheel Drive.................................. 101, 106
Operation.................................................. 101
System...................................................... 101
Four Wheel Drive Operation .......................... 101
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 238
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................. 253
Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 277
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
325
Fuel ...............................................................313
Adding .......................................................134
Additives ...................................................314
Clean Air....................................................314
Economy Mode............................................96
Ethanol......................................................314
Gasoline ....................................................313
Light ............................................................ 83
Materials Added........................................314
Methanol...................................................314
Octane Rating ................................. 313, 317
Requirements ...........................................313
Tank Capacity............................................316
Fueling...........................................................134
Fuses.............................................................278
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .................... 40
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................313
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................314
Gasoline, Reformulated.................................314
Gear Ranges.................................................... 98
Glass Cleaning...............................................311
Glove Compartment Storage ........................... 56
Gross Axle Weight Rating...............................137
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..........................136
GVWR ............................................................135
H
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................. 238
Head Restraints...............................................34
Head Rests ......................................................34
Headlights
Cleaning ................................................... 309
Delay ...........................................................47
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........46
Lights On Reminder.....................................47
On With Wipers............................................46
Passing........................................................46
Switch..........................................................44
Heated Mirrors.................................................40
Heated Seats...................................................34
Heated Steering Wheel.............................26, 27
Heater, Engine Block .......................................93
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 191
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 191
Hill Start Assist.............................................. 192
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 139
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener).....................40
Hood
Closing.........................................................66
Opening.......................................................66
Hood Prop........................................................66
Hood Release ..................................................66
I
Ignition.............................................................17
Switch..........................................................17
Inside Rearview Mirror .................................. 238
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions.................................................87
Display.........................................................73
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................75
Menu Items .................................................75
Instrument Cluster Display...............................74
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 311
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 310
Interior Lights...................................................48
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................50
Inverter
Power...........................................................60
iPod Control .....................................................57
iPod/USB/MP3 Control....................................57
Bluetooth Streaming Audio..........................57
J
Jack Location ................................................ 242
Jack Operation .....................................242, 243
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 243
Jump Starting................................................ 248
11
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326
K
Key Fob
Arm The System .......................................... 21
Disarm The System ..................................... 21
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 16
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................................... 15
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................................... 16
Keyless Enter 'n Go™....................................... 23
Passive Entry............................................... 23
Keys................................................................. 14
Replacement...............................................16
L
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 48
LaneSense ....................................................130
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................206
Latches..........................................................236
Hood ........................................................... 66
Lead Free Gasoline........................................313
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................236
Life Of Tires ...................................................301
Liftgate ............................................................ 66
Closing ........................................................ 67
Opening....................................................... 66
Power .......................................................... 67
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ....................... 51
Light Bulbs.....................................................236
Lights............................................................ 236
4WD Low .....................................................86
Air Bag...................................... 79, 213, 235
Air Suspension ............................................85
Ambient.......................................................49
Automatic Headlights ..................................46
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 191
Brake Warning.............................................80
Bulb Replacement.................................... 286
Courtesy/Reading .......................................48
Cruise ...................................................86, 87
Daytime Running.........................................45
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...........................49
Electric Power Steering Fail.........................81
Electronic Stability Control...........................83
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator..................................................81
Exterior ...............................................44, 236
Fog .......................................................47, 86
Forward Collision Warning...........................86
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 238
Headlights On With Wipers..........................46
High Beam...................................................87
High Beam/Low Beam Select...............45, 46
Hill Descent Control Indicator.............87, 191
Hood Open ..................................................81
Interior.........................................................48
LaneSense .................................... 83, 86, 87
Lights On Reminder.....................................47
Low Fuel ......................................................83
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)..........83
Map .............................................................48
NEUTRAL .....................................................86
Oil Temperature...........................................82
Park ......................................................46, 86
Passing ........................................................46
Reading .......................................................48
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................82
Security Alarm .............................................82
Selec Speed Control ....................................87
Service...................................................... 286
Service 4WD ................................................84
Service Adaptive Cruise Control...................82
Service Forward Collision Warning...............84
Service LaneSense ......................................83
Side Marker .............................................. 289
Sport............................................................86
Stop Start ....................................................86
Traction Control ........................................ 191
Transmission Temperature..........................82
Turn Signals....................... 47, 87, 236, 289
Vanity Mirror ................................................38
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .....................................81, 87
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode........................78
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................78
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............78
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor...............78
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
327
Loading Vehicle .............................................135
Tires ..........................................................296
Locks
Automatic Door ........................................... 25
Child Protection........................................... 26
Power Door.................................................. 23
Lubrication, Body...........................................269
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................312
Luggage Carrier ...............................................70
M
Maintenance ............................................ 63, 65
Maintenance Free Battery .............................263
Maintenance Schedule..................................257
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..... 83
Manual
Service ......................................................320
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .................... 28
Memory Seat ................................................... 28
Methanol .......................................................314
Mirrors............................................................. 38
Automatic Dimming..................................... 38
Electric Remote........................................... 39
Exterior Folding ........................................... 39
Heated ........................................................ 40
Outside........................................................ 39
Rearview ...................................................238
Vanity .......................................................... 38
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.........................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System...................... 201
Mopar Parts .................................................. 320
Multi-Function Control Lever............................45
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period............................94
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 204
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 313
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 265
Oil Filter, Selection........................................ 265
Oil Pressure Light.............................................81
Oil Reset ..........................................................75
Oil, Engine............................................ 264, 317
Capacity.................................................... 316
Checking................................................... 263
Dipstick .................................................... 263
Disposal ................................................... 265
Filter ................................................ 265, 317
Filter Disposal........................................... 265
Identification Logo.................................... 264
Materials Added To .................................. 265
Pressure Warning Light ...............................81
Recommendation............................ 264, 316
Synthetic .................................................. 265
Viscosity ................................................... 316
Onboard Diagnostic System.............................88
Operating Precautions .....................................88
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual........................................ 320
Outside Rearview Mirrors.................................39
Overhead Console............................................57
P
Paddle Shifters ................................................99
Paint Care ..................................................... 309
Parking Brake ..................................................94
ParkSense Active Park Assist........................ 126
ParkSense System, Rear............................... 120
Passive Entry....................................................23
Pets............................................................... 234
Pinch Protection........................................63, 65
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 296
Power
Brakes ...................................................... 312
Distribution Center (Fuses)....................... 279
Door Locks...................................................23
Inverter ........................................................60
Mirrors .........................................................39
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet).................58
Seats ...........................................................32
Steering .................................................... 107
Sunroof.................................................62, 64
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column................27
Windows ......................................................61
11
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328
Power Seats
Forward ....................................................... 32
Rearward..................................................... 32
Recline ........................................................ 33
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................210
Preparation For Jacking.................................242
Pretensioners
Seat Belts..................................................210
Q
Quadra-Lift.....................................................103
Quadra-Trac...................................................101
R
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................300
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............274
Radio Operation ............................................183
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 50
Rear Axle (Differential)...................................277
Rear Camera .................................................132
Rear Cross Path.............................................198
Rear ParkSense System ................................120
Rear Wiper/Washer......................................... 51
Rearview Mirror ............................................... 38
Reclining Front Seats.......................................30
Recreational Towing ..................................... 146
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 314
Refrigerant........................................... 266, 267
Release, Hood .................................................66
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 205
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................................18
Remote Keyless Entry......................................14
Arm The Alarm.............................................21
Disarm The Alarm........................................21
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............16
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................20
Remote Starting System ..................................18
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 286
Replacement Keys...........................................16
Replacement Tires........................................ 302
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 320
Restraints, Child ........................................... 221
Restraints, Head..............................................34
Retractable Cargo Area Cover..........................69
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 9
Roof Luggage Rack..........................................70
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 307
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 235
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle...................... 236
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 320
Safety Information, Tire................................. 291
Safety Tips .................................................... 234
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 237
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 257
Seat Belt Reminder..........................................82
Seat Belts ............................................ 205, 235
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 209
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 209
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ............................................ 209
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 210
Child Restraints ........................................ 221
Energy Management Feature ................... 210
Extender ................................................... 209
Front Seat...............................205, 206, 207
Inspection................................................. 235
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 207
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 208
Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 206
Operating Instructions .............................. 207
Pregnant Women...................................... 210
Pretensioners ........................................... 210
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
329
Rear Seat ..................................................206
Reminder ..................................................205
Seat Belt Extender ....................................209
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................210
Untwisting Procedure ................................208
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................310
Seats ................................................. 29, 32, 34
Adjustment........................................... 29, 32
Easy Entry ................................................... 33
Head Restraints .......................................... 34
Heated ........................................................ 34
Rear Folding................................................ 29
Reclining ..................................................... 30
Seatback Release ....................................... 29
Tilting .......................................................... 29
Security Alarm .......................................... 21, 82
Arm The System .......................................... 21
Disarm The System ..................................... 21
Selec-Terrain .................................................106
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)...................317
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................. 17
Sentry Key Replacement ................................. 16
Service Assistance.........................................318
Service Contract ............................................319
Service Manuals ........................................... 320
Shifting ............................................................95
Automatic Transmission .......................95, 97
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 206
Signals, Turn................................. 87, 236, 289
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 306
Snow Tires .................................................... 303
Spare Tires ........................243, 303, 304, 305
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............................................. 111
Accel/Decel (ACC Only)............................. 115
Cancel ...................................................... 111
Resume .................................................... 111
Set............................................................ 110
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..................... 110
Starting ............................................................90
Button .........................................................17
Cold Weather...............................................93
Engine Block Heater....................................93
Engine Fails To Start....................................93
Remote........................................................18
Starting And Operating.....................................90
Starting Procedures.........................................90
Steering
Power........................................................ 107
Tilt Column............................................26, 27
Wheel, Heated ......................................26, 27
Wheel, Tilt.............................................26, 27
Storage ............................................................56
Console........................................................56
Door.............................................................56
Glove Compartment.....................................56
Sunglasses ..................................................57
Storage Bin ......................................................68
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 55, 309
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 309
Sun Roof .....................................62, 63, 64, 65
Opening ................................................63, 64
Sun Visor..........................................................38
Sunglasses Storage .........................................57
Sunshade Operation .................................63, 65
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 195
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 265
System, Remote Starting .................................18
11
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330
T
Telescoping Steering Column ................... 26, 27
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............54
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo.................................... 70
Tilt Steering Column ................................. 26, 27
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........296
Tire Markings.................................................291
Tire Safety Information ..................................291
Tires...................................236, 299, 303, 308
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................301
Air Pressure...............................................299
Chains .......................................................306
Changing ...................................................242
Compact Spare .........................................303
General Information ........................ 299, 303
High Speed................................................300
Inflation Pressure......................................299
Jacking ......................................................242
Life Of Tires ...............................................301
Load Capacity............................................296
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ...........................................84, 201
Quality Grading......................................... 308
Radial ....................................................... 300
Replacement ............................................ 302
Rotation.................................................... 307
Safety .............................................. 291, 299
Sizes......................................................... 292
Snow Tires................................................ 303
Spare Tires ....................243, 303, 304, 305
Spinning ................................................... 301
Trailer Towing ........................................... 143
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 301
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 312
To Open Hood ..................................................66
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 141
Tow Hooks
Emergency................................................ 256
Towing ................................................. 136, 253
Disabled Vehicle....................................... 253
Guide........................................................ 140
Recreational ............................................. 146
Weight ...................................................... 140
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 146
Traction Control ............................................ 195
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)............................. 195
Trailer Towing................................................ 136
Hitches ..................................................... 139
Minimum Requirements ........................... 142
Tips........................................................... 145
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 141
Wiring ....................................................... 144
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 140
Trailer Weight................................................ 140
Transfer Case................................................ 278
Fluid.......................................................... 317
Maintenance ............................................ 278
Transmission....................................................97
Automatic .......................................... 97, 276
Fluid.......................................................... 317
Maintenance ............................................ 276
Shifting ........................................................95
Transporting Pets.......................................... 234
Tread Wear Indicators................................... 301
Trip Computer ..................................................79
Turn Signals .................................... 47, 87, 289
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
331
U
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ............. 23
Passive Entry Programming......................... 23
Uconnect Voice Command .............................. 37
Uniform Tire Quality Grades...........................308
Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®)
S
............................................. 41
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................313
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................208
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................38
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............312
Vehicle Loading ................................... 135, 296
Vehicle Maintenance.....................................264
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................... 10
Vehicle Storage ......................................55, 309
Voice Recognition System (VR)........................ 37
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard............................. 238
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ....................83
Warnings, Roll Over ........................................... 9
Warranty Information
S
.............................. 320
Washers, Windshield ..............................49, 263
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 309
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 305
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim........................... 305
Wind Buffeting .................................................62
Window Fogging...............................................55
Windows
Power...........................................................61
Windshield Defroster .................................... 235
Windshield Washers .............................. 49, 263
Fluid.......................................................... 263
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 269
Windshield Wipers ...........................................49
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 269
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................50
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................50
11
22_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Second Edition
22_WK_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
